
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Marks</id>
	<title>High5Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Marks"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Marks"/>
	<updated>2026-06-02T11:41:09Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.35.11</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Inventory&amp;diff=6456</id>
		<title>Inventory</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Inventory&amp;diff=6456"/>
		<updated>2020-03-31T16:09:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: new page for landed costs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;In the Inventory section of the Inventory module you can setup and access all inventory items. View stock for the item, move stock between warehouses, view item purchase history, and setup ordering information for the item. You can also initiate a PO from the inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inventory Management ==&lt;br /&gt;
Managing inventory takes different levels of effort depending upon the amount of inventory control you want for your company.  SME does LOTS of automation to automatically handle many of the steps and business process, however if you want complex inventory control, it will require more effort from inventory personnel.  SME will handle any of the level of inventory control you want for your business.  You can also start with simple inventory control and get more elaborate as your business needs by adding warehouses and serialized inventory tracking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a list of amount of inventory management required based upon how much inventory control you want from least amount of effort to most amount:&lt;br /&gt;
# Don&amp;#039;t track any stock and everything is just JIT.  This requires no additional effort or management, but also you would not know how much stock you have.&lt;br /&gt;
# Normal inventory stock management with one warehouse.  This requires someone to track inventory allocations, manage PO&amp;#039;s and make sure allocations are made if for example you added something that doesn&amp;#039;t exist to an order now and then do an independent PO later.&lt;br /&gt;
# Inventory stock with multiple warehouse.  Requires the above plus making sure inventory pulled and added to correct warehouse and requires transfers between warehouses.&lt;br /&gt;
# Serialized inventory with multiple warehouses.  Requires serial number tracking from PO receipt all the way through system&lt;br /&gt;
# Serialized, multiple warehouse, and strict inventory control.  Requires the most management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inventory Item Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
In each inventory item you can track your stock levels and see how many parts are available for orders and how many parts are reserved on orders.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To see how SME handles inventory stock valuation see [[Inventory Valuation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Circled in the image below, you will see the inventory summary for an inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:StockSummary.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;On Hand&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The quantity of stock in your warehouses. On Hand increases when stock is added to your warehouses, decreases when stock is delivered to customer (reserved on an order and the order is closed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Allocated&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Number of parts requested to be reserved for a service order, install orders, or itemized invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reserved&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The number of parts applied to service orders, install orders, or itemized invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unallocated&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The number of parts that are available to allocate to an order (parts available to request to reserve on an order) (Unallocated = Available - Allocated)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Available&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The number of parts in your warehouses that aren’t reserved. (on hand – reserved = available)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ON PO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Number of items on purchase orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RMA Out&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Number of items on return&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cost&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – The cost of all stock available for the item (On the Material Details tab, Quantity * Item Cost)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Retail Value&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – the retail value for all stock available for the item (On the Material Details tab, sum up Quantity * Item Retail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create a New Inventory Item ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are syncing SME with QuickBooks and you have inventory items in QuickBooks, your inventory items will be imported. If you are not syncing with QuickBooks, this is how you can create inventory items in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       In the Inventory module, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Details and Settings Tab&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;MsoTableGrid&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border-collapse: collapse; border: medium none&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 9.65in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;926&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:BlankInventoryItem.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Description of Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Name of the inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 11.65pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt; height: 11.65pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt; height: 11.65pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Description of the inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Cost&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Your cost to buy this item&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Retail&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
The amount you sell this item for&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Condition&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Select a general condition for the item.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
You can customize the drop down values to describe the status of the items&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Select the warehouse you are using to store this item. When receiving items on a PO, SME will add the stock to the default location.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Man. Part Number&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Manufacturer part number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Class&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Class. Classes are imported from QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Shelf and Bin&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter where you are storing the item in the warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HW and SW Version&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Hardware and Software Version&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Number&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
You can type the barcode number here&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Parent Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
To create a hierarchy of inventory items, you can select another item as the parent item. You can then search your items by parent.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;System Type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;apple-style-span&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Used to designate major systems of inventory or customer equipment.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Group code&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;apple-style-span&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Used to group or categorize parts.  For example, plumbing, electrical, etc. &amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cust. Warranty Months&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the warranty period you offer your customers for this part&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendor Warranty Months&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the warranty period your vendor offers you&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Labor Hours&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the estimated labor hours associated with this item. When this item is added to an order, your user will be prompted to add those labor hours in the Labor Editor window.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MTBF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter mean time before failure is applicable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Non –Taxable&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Check here if this item is non-taxable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add to Cust EQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
If this is checked, when this item is added to an order, the item will be automatically added to the customer equipment list. Check this for all major items.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Is Active&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Check if the item is active&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Pre-approve Purchase Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
If this is checked, SME will not require approval when placing the item on a purchase order.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Serialized&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Check here if this is a serialized part&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Maintain Price Books&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;apple-style-span&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;When the cost/retail is changed in the price book (depending on settings), then all records with this flag checked will also be updated.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Force JIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;apple-style-span&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;If you check this and this item is added to a service order, install order, or itemized invoice, SME will not try to allocate stock. The item will go to &amp;quot;has ordered items&amp;quot; automatically, even if there is stock available.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Don&amp;#039;t update cost when receiving from PO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;apple-style-span&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;If this is checked, when you add the item to a PO and change the cost of the item on the PO, the cost of the inventory item won&amp;#039;t change.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border: medium none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Non-Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border: medium none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Check here if you don’t want to track inventory on this item. For example, with a bucket of screws you might not want to count every item in the bucket.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Image below&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The image below show how the Name and Description fields in SME Inventory Item sync to QuickBooks Inventory Item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InventoryItemFields_SyncToQB.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Ordering Information Tab&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
On the Ordering Information tab, you setup ordering information such as the vendor, minimum quantity on hand and the reorder amount.  Below is a description of all the fields on this tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrderingInformationTab.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Minimum On Hand&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Enter the minimum quantity you want in stock in your warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reorder Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Set the quantity you want to reorder if you hit your minimum threshold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quantity Sold YTD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – This is a calculated field that shows you how many you have sold year to date. The field is updated when the order containing the item is invoiced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Count required to fill orders (JIT)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; –  The number of items tied to orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Manufacturer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Enter the part manufacturer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select your default vendor. When placing a PO for this item from an order, this vendor automatically populates the vendor field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lead Time (Days)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The typical time it takes the vendor to deliver the part. Used as a reference field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Count Cycle&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select how often you want to count this inventory item (e.g. annually, quarterly, or monthly)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unit Of Measure&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Reference field for the items unit of measure (feet, lbs, etc).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Weight (lbs)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Enter the item weight as reference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Last Sold Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – The last date the item was sold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Last Order Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; –The last date the item was placed on a Purchase Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Last Received Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – The last date the item was received into inventory on a Purchase Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Last Reconciliation Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – The last date the item quantities were reconciled using the Inventory Reconciliation utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Vendors Tab&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
On the Vendor tab, enter additional vendors that supply this part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ItemVendor.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;MsoTableGrid&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border-collapse: collapse; border: medium none&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 74.25pt; border-width: 1pt medium; border-style: solid none; border-color: black -moz-use-text-color; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;99&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 262.35pt; border-width: 1pt medium; border-style: solid none; border-color: black -moz-use-text-color; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Select the vendor from the drop down list.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 74.25pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;99&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendor Zone&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 262.35pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Shows the zone assigned to the vendor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 74.25pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;99&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item name, Number and Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 262.35pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Populated from the inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 74.25pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;99&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Manufacturer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 262.35pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the manufacturer of the item&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 74.25pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;99&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lead Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 262.35pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the vendors lead time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 74.25pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;99&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;System type &amp;amp; Man. Part Number&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 262.35pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Populated from the inventory items Defaults and Settings tab.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 74.25pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;99&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendor Part Number&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 262.35pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your vendor’s part number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 74.25pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;99&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Cost, PO Item Cost and Retail Price&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 262.35pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Populated from the inventory item Defaults and Settings tab.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 74.25pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;99&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Landed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 262.35pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Check [[Landed]] if you are including the shipping cost in the PO Item cost. This is a reference field only.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Stock Tab&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
On the Stock tab, you will see a summary of stock for each warehouse location. You can see the stock quantity, the amount reserved, and the amount of stock available at each location. Although the inventory count information is shown on the main page of the inventory item, it is not directly editable as an item. Instead stock levels are controlled through adding of stock (typically only initially), purchase orders (PO&amp;#039;s), and inventory reconciliation adjustments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:STockTab.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Add Stock Item&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once you get started using SME, you will add stock to inventory through purchase orders. When getting started setting up your stock in SME, you may need to manually enter stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddStockItem.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;*NOTE*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; If you are tracking inventory quantities in QuickBooks, any stock manually entered in SME using “Add Stock Items” will also need to be entered into QuickBooks.  Only invoices from SME automatically deplete inventory in QuickBooks. Only POs or Bills from SME automatically increase inventory in QuickBooks. Therefore, it is recommended for most stock transactions to go through purchase orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adding Non-Serialized Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the inventory item you need to add stock for.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the Stock tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click Add Stock Items.&lt;br /&gt;
#       In the top portion of the Inventory Stock Editor window, you can change the warehouse you are adding stock to.&lt;br /&gt;
#        Update the quantity in the Add Qty field.&lt;br /&gt;
#      Enter additional information such as condition, shelf and bin number.&lt;br /&gt;
#      Click OK and the stock is added to inventory. Notice the summary quantities at the top of the inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adding Serialized Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the inventory item you need to add stock for.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the Stock tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click Add Stock Items.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Enter Serial Number&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; for Single Serial entry or click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Range&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; for Range&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:addingserialized.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;View Stock Details in Warehouses&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see stock details by warehouse location and change serial numbers, you can use the Inventory Stock Editor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       On the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, select the warehouse location you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       The material details for that stock warehouse location will open in the Inventory Stock Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#       You can right click on a material detail item to edit the serial number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ViewStockDetails.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Material Details Tab&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Material Details tab provides details on all the material for this inventory item. For serialized items, the Material Details tab shows each stock item on a separate line. Notice the Quantity, Reserved, Available and Serial # columns. For non-serialized items each line is a stock lot, meaning something is different in each lot such as vendor or pricing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MaterialDetails2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Move stock to another warhouse&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This allows the movement of individual stock items. If items are moved to a warehouse, that warehouse will be created in Stock tab if it does not already show. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       On the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Material Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, select the stock you need to move.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       In the Move Stock window, select the warehouse you are moving the item to in the Destination field. Enter Shelf and Bin if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you are moving non-serialized stock, you may be moving part of a stock lot. Enter the quantity from the lot you want to move in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MoveStock.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Notice the location change on the Material Details tab and the Stock tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;View stock item transactions&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To view the history of transactions for material:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Select the&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Material Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Right click on item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;View Item Transactions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       The transaction history will open in another window. (image on right)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ItemTransactions.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Export material details to Excel&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.       Select the Material Details tab.&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Right click in the grid and select Export to Excel (image on right).&lt;br /&gt;
3.       Select where you want to save the file and click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:excelmaterialDetails.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Kit Items&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you add material to an order, you may need to know what parts go with that material. You can add this related material on the Kit Items tab. When you are adding the material to an order, you can reference the kit items so you know what other material you may need to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add kit items to an inventory item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Go to an inventory item in the Inventory module.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Kit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Items tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Kit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Item.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Referencing kit items in an order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Create a new order.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Materials&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Select the inventory item you created the kit for.&lt;br /&gt;
#    In the window that opens, select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Kit Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab and you will see the material in the associated kit. &lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReferenceKitItems.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Purchase History&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The purchase history tab provides information about all purchase orders placed for the inventory item. Double click on a line in the grid, and SME will jump to the purchase order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Syncing Inventory with QuickBooks (Link Options tab)&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To read about syncing inventory between SME and QuickBooks, go to the [[Default Export to QuickBooks Settings]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings#Export_Options_for_Inventory_Items&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inventory Pricing Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are several options for setting up pricing for inventory items. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Standard Retail Price &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Price Book&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Pricing Levels&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Standard Retail Price&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The amount entered in the Retail field on an inventory item will be the standard price for the item when added to an order.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:StandardRetailPrice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Price Book&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Price Books are used to assign customer specific pricing during order entry. You can assign a price book to a customer and all orders created for the customer will use the pricing rules assigned in the price books. An example of a price books is “30% higher than cost” or “10% less than retail”. You may also have a price book for customers that have special service pricing, different than your standard service prices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To learn about setting up price books and adding items to price books, go to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Price Books]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:InventoryItem_PriceBooksTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Price Levels&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can also create pricing levels, either a perfect markup on the standard or a price you enter. When adding the material to an order, you can select what price level you want to use for that item (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AddItemToOrder_SelectPriceLevel.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To setup price levels:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to your inventory items &amp;gt; Price Levels tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Level 1 will be your standard retail price.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. for levels 2 - 5 you can either do a percent markup from retail (first image below) or enter in a specific amount (second image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AssigingPriceLevels.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When adding the inventory item to an order, the price field will populate with the standard retail. Select a price level and the price field will be updated based on the price levels setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;For more information about adding material to orders, go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Add Items to Orders]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Markup Field&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The Markup field will take the cost from the Details and Settings tab and multiply it by the Markup field to update the Retail field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PricingLevelsTab_Markup%Field.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The way SME calculates the Markup:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Cost * 1 + Markup = Price&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.92 * 1.58 = 3.03&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Searching Inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Search window to look up inventory items and export your inventory item list to Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.    Select Inventory module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.    Click Search and select Search Active Items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SearchActiveInventoyrItems.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.    Double click on the item in the list to go to the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Choose columns in Search Active Items&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You can sort your items by every column you view in the Search Active Items window. You can also select which columns you are viewing in this window.  You might want to have the ability to sort your items by Item Number, System Type, minimum on hand, or Available.  To choose columns:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. In the Search Active Items window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Views, Add Remove Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Grid Columns&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window that displays, check the item fields you want to view as columns. Uncheck the ones you don’t want to view. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GridColumns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Notice the columns you selected added.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click on any column header to sort the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. When you close the Search Active Items window, you will be prompted to save your new view. If you want to, click OK and type a name for the view. The view will be saved for you. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;**NOTE**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; When you save a new view, all SME users will have access to the view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Select Saved View&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. In the Inventory module, click Search, Search Active Items.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. In the Search Active Items window, click Views, Apply View and select the custom view. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ApplyView.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.The grid will change to the custom view you created. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Search For Field&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field allows you to type the name of the record you want to find instead of scrolling through your list. This can save you time if your list is long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Click the column header you want to search by.(1)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Type the name you are searching for in the Search For field. (2) As you type, the row will be highlighted.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Either double click on the record to open customer, or when the customer is highlighted hit enter on your keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SearchForO_Inventory.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Grouping by Columns&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the search window, you can group the data by a column. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Drag and drop column header into the gray header area above the columns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DragToGroup.png]][[File:Grouped.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Notice the data grouped by the data in the column selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click the plus sign in each group to expand the group.  (image on right)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Remove grouping by dragging the column header back in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Export Search View to Excel&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. In Search window, click Export and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export to Excel&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ExportInventorySearch.png]]  [[File:InventorySearch_Excel.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. In the window that opens, Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and Excel will launch with your inventory data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Use Excel tools to manipulate the data&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Filtering Search&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply filters to your search view to see only the data you want to see. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Make sure the data you want to filter by is added as a column in your view.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click the Filter icon [[File:FilterIcon.jpg]] at the bottom of the search window.&lt;br /&gt;
#    In the Filter Builder window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;press the button to add a new condition&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to select the field that contains the value you want to filter by. (1)&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;like&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to select the filter type.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;empty&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and type the value you want to filter the search by. (2)&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and your search view is filtered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can apply more than one filter to your search view by clicking &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;press the button to add a new condition and setting the condition.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Filtering.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Look up by Item Number&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Navigate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Go To&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Navigate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Find Item Number&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window, type the item number you want to open and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manage Grid Columns on Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout the many tabs in SME, you will find grids. You can rearrange the order of the columns in the grid, remove columns from the grid and add them back to the grid. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Rearrange column order and width&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can move and change the width of the columns. To change the width, click your cursor in the column header between two columns and you will see the cross arrow. Drag your cursor to the desired column width. To change the order, click the column header and drag the column header to the desired column header location in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Remove columns&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a column, drag and drop the column above the grid as shown in the image below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Grids.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Add columns that were previously removed&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Right click on any material.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Select Add Columns to Grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#    In the Customization Window you will see all columns that were previously removed.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Drag and drop the column you want to add back to the grid as shown in the screenshot below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddColumnToGrid.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SnapShot tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:InventoryItem_SnapShotTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The SnapShot tab in an inventory item summarizes the following information for that item when the snapshot is taken:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SnapShotGridDefinitions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To setup how frequently SME takes a snapshot of your inventory items, go To Setup module &amp;gt; Company &amp;gt; Inventory. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Company]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and go to the Inventory section to learn more.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Inventory_Setup&amp;diff=6453</id>
		<title>Inventory Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Inventory_Setup&amp;diff=6453"/>
		<updated>2020-02-28T19:11:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: /* PO Syncing to QuickBooks options */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Maintaining Inventory Items in both SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks, or in SME Only ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Maintaining Inventory Items in both SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If your inventory items are in both SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks, each of your inventory items in QuickBooks will have the accounts set on them. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- On your initial sync between SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks, your inventory items will sync to SME with the quantities&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Going forward, to increase the quantity of inventory items in SME, you&amp;#039;ll either have to place a PO in SME and receive the items, or manually add stock to the item in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- The QB Item quantities increase when you create a PO in SME, receive the item in SME, and send the bill for the items received over to QB. The PO Bill increases the stock in QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- The QB Item quantities decrease when you create an invoice in SME for the item and sync the invoice to QB. The invoice depletes the stock in QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- If you manually add stock or adjust stock in SME, you&amp;#039;ll have to manually adjust in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Maintaining Inventory Items in SME Only&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you choose to keep your inventory items in SME only, then you can turn on the option to let SME make General Ledger entries in QuickBooks to your COGS and Inventory Asset Accounts. If this setting is setup:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-When an item is purchased in SME, when the item is received a Bill will be sent to QuickBooks and the following GL Entries will be made:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:GLENtriesone.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When an item is invoice in SME, the following GL Entries will be made in QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MaterialInvoiceGL.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[GL Entries for SME Inventory]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; page to read about the options for setting up maintaining inventory in SME only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PO Syncing to QuickBooks options ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two options for how SME Purchase Orders sync to QuickBooks. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) PO created in SME syncs to QuickBooks as a PO. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Items received on the SME PO will be sent to QB on a bill for what you owe the vendor.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Below is a video showing the two options.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;{{#ev:youtube| 9K5J9KmqIUs }}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click the link below to see how to setup the option you select:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings#Export_Options_for_Purchase_Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SMP_Item Passthrough Item ==&lt;br /&gt;
If an inventory item is in SME and not in QuickBooks, QuickBooks will need to know what accounts to use for it if it is sent over to QuickBooks on an invoice, purchase order, or bill for PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SMP_Item_Example.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To set the account on the SMP_Item passthrough item:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- In QuickBooks, click Lists &amp;gt; Item List&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Open SMP_Item in the item list&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Set the income account. Keep this item as a non-inventory item. Keep it as a non-inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To read more about the passthrough items, go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[SMP Items]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The one used for Inventory is SMP_Item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inventory Setup Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;SME Setup Options&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If SME Setup module &amp;gt; Company &amp;gt; Inventory you will see some settings related to inventory and purchase orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:InventoryDefaultSettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click the link below to view inventory setup options in the SME Setup module:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=Company#Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Also another setting most SME User check is Auto Deliver Allocated on Close (image below):&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Auto Deliver Allocated on Close&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - With this option checked, any material on an order with the Item Status of Allocated will be changed to Delivered when you close the order and stock will be depleted. This saves a step from having to manually reserve stock to deplete stock. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AutoDeliverAllocatedOnCloseSetting.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;SQLink Setup Options&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Open SQLink and click File &amp;gt; Setup to get to these options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SQLink_InventorySettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Include SMP Items on Purchase Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Set this to transfer info to PO’s for items not in QB, either because you do SME only inventory, or some items have not made it to QB and are on a PO&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Use general ledger entries for Default Material Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This setting is recommended to be checked if you keep your inventory items in SME only, not in both SME and QuickBooks. See the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[GL Entries for SME Inventory]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; page for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Purchase Order Options section&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you are creating Purchase Orders in SME, you need to decide how your SME POs are going to sync with QuickBooks. You have the following options:  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Create PO in SME and SME will send the same PO to QuickBooks on the next sync. You would have to receive stock on both POs.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; - Create PO in SME, receive items on the PO in SME, on next sync SME will put a bill in QB for the items received. The bill will increase the stock in QB.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Create PO in SME and send both the PO and the Bill in QuickBooks.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click this link for details on setup in both SQLink and SME:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings#Export_Options_for_Purchase_Orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Initialize PO Bill Date to from Received Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: - If checked, the date on the bill that goes to QB will be the date you received the item, not the PO date.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Initialize by PO Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sets the date on the Bill in QB to the line item receipt date from the SME PO&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Inventory_Setup&amp;diff=6452</id>
		<title>Inventory Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Inventory_Setup&amp;diff=6452"/>
		<updated>2020-02-28T19:10:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: /* PO Syncing to QuickBooks options */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Maintaining Inventory Items in both SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks, or in SME Only ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Maintaining Inventory Items in both SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If your inventory items are in both SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks, each of your inventory items in QuickBooks will have the accounts set on them. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- On your initial sync between SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks, your inventory items will sync to SME with the quantities&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Going forward, to increase the quantity of inventory items in SME, you&amp;#039;ll either have to place a PO in SME and receive the items, or manually add stock to the item in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- The QB Item quantities increase when you create a PO in SME, receive the item in SME, and send the bill for the items received over to QB. The PO Bill increases the stock in QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- The QB Item quantities decrease when you create an invoice in SME for the item and sync the invoice to QB. The invoice depletes the stock in QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- If you manually add stock or adjust stock in SME, you&amp;#039;ll have to manually adjust in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Maintaining Inventory Items in SME Only&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you choose to keep your inventory items in SME only, then you can turn on the option to let SME make General Ledger entries in QuickBooks to your COGS and Inventory Asset Accounts. If this setting is setup:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-When an item is purchased in SME, when the item is received a Bill will be sent to QuickBooks and the following GL Entries will be made:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:GLENtriesone.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When an item is invoice in SME, the following GL Entries will be made in QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MaterialInvoiceGL.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[GL Entries for SME Inventory]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; page to read about the options for setting up maintaining inventory in SME only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PO Syncing to QuickBooks options ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two options for how SME Purchase Orders sync to QuickBooks. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) PO created in SME syncs to QuickBooks as a PO. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Items received on the SME PO will be sent to QB on a bill for what you owe the vendor.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Below is a video showing the two options.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;{{#ev:youtube| 9K5J9KmqIUs }}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click the link below to see how to setup the option you select:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings#Export_Options_for_Purchase_Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings#Export_Options_for_Purchase_Orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SMP_Item Passthrough Item ==&lt;br /&gt;
If an inventory item is in SME and not in QuickBooks, QuickBooks will need to know what accounts to use for it if it is sent over to QuickBooks on an invoice, purchase order, or bill for PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SMP_Item_Example.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To set the account on the SMP_Item passthrough item:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- In QuickBooks, click Lists &amp;gt; Item List&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Open SMP_Item in the item list&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Set the income account. Keep this item as a non-inventory item. Keep it as a non-inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To read more about the passthrough items, go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[SMP Items]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The one used for Inventory is SMP_Item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inventory Setup Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;SME Setup Options&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If SME Setup module &amp;gt; Company &amp;gt; Inventory you will see some settings related to inventory and purchase orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:InventoryDefaultSettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click the link below to view inventory setup options in the SME Setup module:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=Company#Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Also another setting most SME User check is Auto Deliver Allocated on Close (image below):&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Auto Deliver Allocated on Close&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - With this option checked, any material on an order with the Item Status of Allocated will be changed to Delivered when you close the order and stock will be depleted. This saves a step from having to manually reserve stock to deplete stock. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AutoDeliverAllocatedOnCloseSetting.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;SQLink Setup Options&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Open SQLink and click File &amp;gt; Setup to get to these options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SQLink_InventorySettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Include SMP Items on Purchase Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Set this to transfer info to PO’s for items not in QB, either because you do SME only inventory, or some items have not made it to QB and are on a PO&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Use general ledger entries for Default Material Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This setting is recommended to be checked if you keep your inventory items in SME only, not in both SME and QuickBooks. See the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[GL Entries for SME Inventory]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; page for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Purchase Order Options section&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you are creating Purchase Orders in SME, you need to decide how your SME POs are going to sync with QuickBooks. You have the following options:  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Create PO in SME and SME will send the same PO to QuickBooks on the next sync. You would have to receive stock on both POs.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; - Create PO in SME, receive items on the PO in SME, on next sync SME will put a bill in QB for the items received. The bill will increase the stock in QB.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Create PO in SME and send both the PO and the Bill in QuickBooks.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click this link for details on setup in both SQLink and SME:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings#Export_Options_for_Purchase_Orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Initialize PO Bill Date to from Received Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: - If checked, the date on the bill that goes to QB will be the date you received the item, not the PO date.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Initialize by PO Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sets the date on the Bill in QB to the line item receipt date from the SME PO&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Inventory_Setup&amp;diff=6451</id>
		<title>Inventory Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Inventory_Setup&amp;diff=6451"/>
		<updated>2020-02-28T19:09:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: covert videoflash to embedvideo&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Maintaining Inventory Items in both SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks, or in SME Only ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Maintaining Inventory Items in both SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If your inventory items are in both SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks, each of your inventory items in QuickBooks will have the accounts set on them. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- On your initial sync between SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks, your inventory items will sync to SME with the quantities&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Going forward, to increase the quantity of inventory items in SME, you&amp;#039;ll either have to place a PO in SME and receive the items, or manually add stock to the item in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- The QB Item quantities increase when you create a PO in SME, receive the item in SME, and send the bill for the items received over to QB. The PO Bill increases the stock in QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- The QB Item quantities decrease when you create an invoice in SME for the item and sync the invoice to QB. The invoice depletes the stock in QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- If you manually add stock or adjust stock in SME, you&amp;#039;ll have to manually adjust in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Maintaining Inventory Items in SME Only&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you choose to keep your inventory items in SME only, then you can turn on the option to let SME make General Ledger entries in QuickBooks to your COGS and Inventory Asset Accounts. If this setting is setup:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-When an item is purchased in SME, when the item is received a Bill will be sent to QuickBooks and the following GL Entries will be made:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:GLENtriesone.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When an item is invoice in SME, the following GL Entries will be made in QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MaterialInvoiceGL.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[GL Entries for SME Inventory]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; page to read about the options for setting up maintaining inventory in SME only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PO Syncing to QuickBooks options ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two options for how SME Purchase Orders sync to QuickBooks. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) PO created in SME syncs to QuickBooks as a PO. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Items received on the SME PO will be sent to QB on a bill for what you owe the vendor.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Below is a video showing the two options.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;{{#ev:youtube| 9K5J9KmqIUs }}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click the link below to see how to setup the option you select:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings#Export_Options_for_Purchase_Orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SMP_Item Passthrough Item ==&lt;br /&gt;
If an inventory item is in SME and not in QuickBooks, QuickBooks will need to know what accounts to use for it if it is sent over to QuickBooks on an invoice, purchase order, or bill for PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SMP_Item_Example.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To set the account on the SMP_Item passthrough item:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- In QuickBooks, click Lists &amp;gt; Item List&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Open SMP_Item in the item list&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Set the income account. Keep this item as a non-inventory item. Keep it as a non-inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To read more about the passthrough items, go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[SMP Items]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The one used for Inventory is SMP_Item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inventory Setup Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;SME Setup Options&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If SME Setup module &amp;gt; Company &amp;gt; Inventory you will see some settings related to inventory and purchase orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:InventoryDefaultSettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click the link below to view inventory setup options in the SME Setup module:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=Company#Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Also another setting most SME User check is Auto Deliver Allocated on Close (image below):&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Auto Deliver Allocated on Close&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - With this option checked, any material on an order with the Item Status of Allocated will be changed to Delivered when you close the order and stock will be depleted. This saves a step from having to manually reserve stock to deplete stock. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AutoDeliverAllocatedOnCloseSetting.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;SQLink Setup Options&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Open SQLink and click File &amp;gt; Setup to get to these options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SQLink_InventorySettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Include SMP Items on Purchase Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Set this to transfer info to PO’s for items not in QB, either because you do SME only inventory, or some items have not made it to QB and are on a PO&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Use general ledger entries for Default Material Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This setting is recommended to be checked if you keep your inventory items in SME only, not in both SME and QuickBooks. See the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[GL Entries for SME Inventory]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; page for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Purchase Order Options section&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you are creating Purchase Orders in SME, you need to decide how your SME POs are going to sync with QuickBooks. You have the following options:  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Create PO in SME and SME will send the same PO to QuickBooks on the next sync. You would have to receive stock on both POs.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; - Create PO in SME, receive items on the PO in SME, on next sync SME will put a bill in QB for the items received. The bill will increase the stock in QB.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Create PO in SME and send both the PO and the Bill in QuickBooks.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click this link for details on setup in both SQLink and SME:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings#Export_Options_for_Purchase_Orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Initialize PO Bill Date to from Received Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: - If checked, the date on the bill that goes to QB will be the date you received the item, not the PO date.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Initialize by PO Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sets the date on the Bill in QB to the line item receipt date from the SME PO&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Customer_Equipment&amp;diff=6450</id>
		<title>Customer Equipment</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Customer_Equipment&amp;diff=6450"/>
		<updated>2020-02-28T19:08:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#ev:youtube| bGawsrnNNFQ }}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
SME has excellent ability to track and manage your customer’s equipment. Customer Equipment is integrated throughout SME to improve tracking of the equipment and provide your customers excellent support. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer/Site&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to select a customer and the customer’s Customer Equipment tree will display (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomerEquipmentTree.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adding Items to Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When setting up your inventory items in SME, you can check Add to Cust EQ (circled in image below). Add this inventory item to an order for a customer and once the order is closed, the equipment will automatically be listed in their Customer Equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:inventoryItem_AddToCustEQ.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Equipment can also be added manually through the Customer Equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer/Site&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the customer you need to add equipment to.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Right click and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add New Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4)  In the Customer Equipment window, click [[File:Magnify.jpg]] next to the Item Name field and select the equipment from the inventory list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Equipment Details ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double click on any equipment in the Customer Equipment list to see the equipment details such as serial number, repair history and set the maintenance expiration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Item Details tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab holds general information about the equipment. Fields to note:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomerEQ_ItemDetails.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Parent Item &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – In the Customer Equipment tree, you can create a hierarchical structure showing sub equipment under parent equipment (e.g. server rack as top level, and components of the server under the top level). There are unlimited levels of parent-child levels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can assign a parent to equipment by selecting the parent in the Parent Item field, or by dragging the item under the parent item on the Customer Equipment tree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt; Reference &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - This number provides an ordering for the equipment in the tree. Lowest number, or blanks,show at the top and highest numbers show at the bottom. You can also rearrange the order by dragging the items around on the equipment tree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Install Date&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – Select a date from calendar to track the install date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MTBF&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;- Mean Time Before Failure is populated from the inventory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Usage Hours&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – Manually enter the usage hours every time you look at the usage hours of the equipment.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;**NOTE**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Your SME Administrator may have created a few custom fields not shown in the screenshot above. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maintenance tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Track maintenance and expiration warranties, set activities for expiration warnings and set the service level agreement for the equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustEQ_MaintenanceTab.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Maintenance and Manufacturer Warranty Expiration&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  - Select the expiration date or click  to select a standard period and the date will populate.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On Expiration, Create an Activity&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;   – Check this and select a SME user to receive the activity upon expiration date. The user selected needs to make sure the check Generate Customer Equipment Warning in Preferences, On Startup tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;SLA Category (Service Level Agreement) &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;   – Set your commitment to the customer for this equipment (e.g. 4 hour response time). Your SME Administrator will set up your SLA Categories.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Maintenance Frequency&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;   – reference field&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Maintenance Price&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – reference field&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Vendor Warranty&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Customer Warranty&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  fields are reference fields populated with information set in inventory item.    &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Repair History tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the Customer Equipment tree, you can right click on an item and select New Service Order. That service order will be listed on the Repair History tab as reference.You can reference the Order #, Service Date and Closed Date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Scheduled Services tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Shows all scheduled services for this equipment. (Note: Scheduled services are not recommended, use Recurring Orders)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Service History tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Shows all service orders for that equipment. If the equipment is added to the Item Repair tab on the service order, then the service order will display on this tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustEQ_ServiceHistoryTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Kit Items tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Kit items can be setup in the inventory item. These are reference items to various parts for the equipment for example parts that should be changed. For example, if the equipment was a specific car model, the kit item might be the oil filter type, the oil type, and the recommended tires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Transactions tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Shows all the equipment transactions such as adding, moving to another customer site, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustEQ_Transaction.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Stored Documents tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;On this tab, you can add new documents to the equipment and view documents that have been added. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomerEquipment_StoredDocumentsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Equipment Actions Menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on any item in the Customer Equipment tree or click the actions menu. You can also select an item and click Actions to initiate an action for the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustEQ_Actions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Add New Item&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – Add a new item to the customer’s equipment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Insert New Item&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Right click on equipment in the list and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Insert New Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The new item will be listed under the equipment you right clicked on, a child under the parent item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Add From Inventory&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Select material from your inventory list to add to your customer&amp;#039;s equipment list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Insert From Inventory&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Right click on equipment and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Insert From Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to select material from your inventory list. The equipment will be listed under the equipment you right clicked on. It will be a child equipment under the parent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Equipment Editor&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – Same as double clicking on the item to edit the equipment details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;New Service Order&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;New Install Order&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;– Creates a new order for this customer and enters this equipment into the Item Repair tab on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Move to another site&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – moves the equipment to another customer or site.  This removes the equipment off the Customer Equipment tree. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Return Remove/Retire&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Sets the equipment status to “retired” on the Customer Equipment tree and creates a Return. In the Return, you can receive the item back into your inventory. To learn more, click [[Returns]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Return Replace&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – Sets the equipment status to “On RMA” and creates a Return. When processing the return in the inventory module, you will be prompted to select another item from inventory to replace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Swap with another item&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Swap this equipment with other equipment for the same customer site. This is used for example if you have a spare part and want to swap with an active part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Delete&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Delete the equipment from the list. Note: this is not reversible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Import From file&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;- Import customer equipment list from a csv (comma separated value) or excel file. This will open the Data Import screen to view and map the data to SME fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Export to Excel&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Export the equipment list to an excel file. You will be prompted to choose a location to save the excel file and the file will automatically open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Print or Email Equipment List ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.       In &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;/&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Site&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to select the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;/&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Email&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustEQ_Print.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu, there are standard reports you can print above the horizontal line and you can also email the standard reports by selecting below the horizontal line. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:custEQ_Printed.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Fields in Customer Equipment ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create custom fields in Customer Equipment to track specific information needed for your situation. The image below shows Customer Equipment with custom fields to Make, Model, Year, VIN Number, etc. If there is data you need to track in equipment, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Custom Tabs and Fields]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to learn how to add the custom fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomerEQ_CustomFields.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Maintenance_Contracts&amp;diff=6449</id>
		<title>Maintenance Contracts</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Maintenance_Contracts&amp;diff=6449"/>
		<updated>2020-02-28T19:07:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: covert videoflash to embedvideo&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Set your customer’s equipment up on a maintenance contract and SME will generate a recurring invoice for the contract. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ev:youtube| 0WjihFBULHw}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create a Maintenance Contract ==&lt;br /&gt;
1.       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customers&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Maintenance Contacts&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Double click on the customer you need to create a contract for. The new maintenance contract is opened for this customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Steps4_7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Details and Setting&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Site&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tabs – This is pulled from the customer record for the customer selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contract&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; # - This field will be auto-populated with a contract number once the contract is saved. If you would rather manually type in a number, you have to provide the user permission to “initialize numbers” in the user group settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Date of Expiration&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select the date the contact ends. You can also click + to select the period (e.g. 30 days, 1 year) and SME will update the date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Salesperson&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select the salesperson on this contract.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SLA Category&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select the SLA Category that applies to the contract. (see the bottom of this page for how to setup a SLA Category)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contract Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – You can customize this drop down list to reflect the milestone you move your contracts through. You can sort and filter your contracts by this field in the search window. It doesn’t prompt anything, it is simply for reference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Class&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – select class if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoicing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab- this is where you will set up the recurring invoicing rules for this maintenance contract.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Recurring Price&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – this is the amount that will be on each invoice that is sent for this contract.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Terms&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – select the invoice terms&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Start Invoice Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – this will populate the Next Invoice Date field in the Recurring Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;End Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – this date will populate the End Date field in the Recurring Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing Frequency&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select how frequently the recurring invoice will generate an invoice for this contract.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contract_Invoicing.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Bi-Weekly&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - adds 14 days to date&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Monthly&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - adds 30 days to date&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Bi-Monthly&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - adds 2 months to date&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quarterly&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - adds 90 days to date&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Semi Annually&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - adds 180 days to date&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Annually&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - adds 365 days to date&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*    Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add/Update Recurring Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Notice the Number of Occurrences and Recurrence Total at the bottom of the tab. This is the amount calculated based on the rules set on this tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
6.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Description tab&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;- the text typed here will transfer to the invoice under &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Work Requested &amp;gt; Services Performed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Equipment tab&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;- this is where you can associate the equipment for the customer that is included on the contract.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*      The Search window will open. You will see all of that customer’s equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*       Double click on the equipment you want to associate to the contract. Hold down the ctrl key on your keyboard as you click to select multiple items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[File:Save.jpg]].  It is very important that you click save after you filled out all of the applicable information on the Details and Settings, Invoicing, Description, and Equipment tabs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A recurring invoice will be created in the Receivables module. The recurring invoice will generate invoices based on the rules you setup in the contract.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Review Recurring Invoice for Contract ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The maintenance contract created for your customer has invoicing settings. Once the maintenance contract is saved, SME will generate a recurring invoice for the customer. This recurring invoice is what generates the invoices throughout the term of the contract based on the rules setup in the contract.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see the recurring invoice generated by the contract:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receivables&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Recurring&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search &amp;gt; Search Open Recurring&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Double click on the customer you created the contract for.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       The recurring invoice that was generated from the contact will open.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       On the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Details and Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab –&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Recurring_DetailsSettings.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Next Invoice Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  – The next invoice date is populated by the date in the Start Invoice Date in the maintenance contract.  After you process an invoice, this date field will update to reflect the next invoice date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing Frequency&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;- The billing frequency setup on the maintenance contract populates here in the recurring invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; End Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Make sure the end date is filled out. If this is not filled out, SME will continuously generate invoices the next time someone processes the recurring invoices on startup. This date should be populated by the date filled out on the maintenance contact &amp;gt;Invoicing tab&amp;gt; End Date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contract #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Notice the maintenance contract number populated here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       On the Work Requested tab you will see the text typed on the Description tab in the Maintenance Contract.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Processing Recurring Invoice for Contract ==&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring invoice rules are setup. SME will generate the invoices based on the rules set. You must select an SME user that will be prompted to generate the invoices. If there are invoices due to be processed, when the user opens SME in the morning they will receive a message that there are invoices ready to be generated. Click Yes and SME will generate the invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Set User Preference&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For the SME user responsible for processing the recurring invoices, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Preferences&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;On Startup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Generate Recurring Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and enter the days in advance of the &amp;quot;next invoice date&amp;quot; you want to be notified to generate the invoice. The day you generate the invoice will be the &amp;quot;invoice date&amp;quot; on the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OnStartup_RecurringInvoice.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Generate the Recurring Invoice On Startup&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the user preferences are setup, that user will be notified when invoices are ready to be generated for the recurring invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GenerateRecurringInvoice.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SME will use the Next Invoice Date on the recurring invoice and the Days in Advances set in preferences to determine which invoices need to be generated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;View Invoices Generated by Recurring Invoice&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the invoices generated:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receivables&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoicing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Open Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       In the Search window you will see all open invoices. Sort by &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to find the invoices you generated. Double click on one to open the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;View Summary of Next Invoice Date and Last Processed Date&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can setup a Search View in Receivables &amp;gt; Recurring that gives you a high level view of recurring invoices based on next invoice date and last generated date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RecurringSearchview.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this is helpful for you, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receivables&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Recurring&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Open Recurring&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Views&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Check the following field names:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CustName, BillName, EndDate, NextInvoiceDate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; (may have to scroll to the right to see this option), &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LastGenerated, Frequency&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GridColumns.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Views&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Enter a name and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use this search view, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; Select your new view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SearchView_NextInvoiceDate.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Equipment on Contract ==&lt;br /&gt;
When viewing your customer equipment, you can see if the equipment is covered on a maintenance contract, see the contract expiration date, and see the SLA category the equipment is assigned to on the contract. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customers &amp;gt; Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer/Site&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and double click on the customer record.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Customer’s equipment list will display.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Double click, on equipment to view the details.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Maintenance&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Review the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Maintenance Expiration&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – this date is populated from the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Maintenance Contract&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Date of Expiration field&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. If the Date of Expiration is changed on the Maintenance Contract, then the Maintenance Expiration date is changed on the Customer Equipment window to reflect that change.&lt;br /&gt;
*      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SLA Category&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – the Service Level Agreement assigned to the equipment in the contract.&lt;br /&gt;
*     &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Current Contract #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - this number is populated from the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Maintenance Contract&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;,&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Contract #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:customerequipment_maintenancetab2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setup SLA Category to assign to a Maintenance Contract ==&lt;br /&gt;
On a maintenance contract you will have customer equipment that is covered on the contract as described above. When you add any of the equipment covered on a contract to the Item Repair tab for that customer, the SLA Category on the contract drives the pricing on the service order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to add the equipment to the Item Repair tab on a service or install order:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Go to Customer Equipment, right click on Equipment and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Service Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Install Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The order will be created with the equipment on the Item Repair tab and the SLA category associated with the contract the equipment is on populating the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Create a service or install order, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Repair&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to the Customer EQ Item field and select the equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The SLA Category defines what the customer is getting charged for on the order &amp;#039;&amp;#039;and/or&amp;#039;&amp;#039; drives the due date on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;For example, you have a contract for a customer that covers part A and whenever you have to send a tech out to do work on that part, you won&amp;#039;t charge for labor, services or material and you need to complete the work within 24 hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To setup the SLA Category:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SLA Categories&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in lower right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. In the editor window, enter a name at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Apply charges for&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; section, check labor, material or services if you want to charge for the items, or leave unchecked if you don&amp;#039;t want the customer to be charged for those items when working on material covered on a maintenance contract. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Due date options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; section, you can choose to let the SLA category populate a due date in the order based on settings in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CreateSLACategory.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You can also manually select an SLA category on any service order and the rules defined in the SLA category will define what items will be charged for on the service or install order and drive the due date as applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Below is a screenshot showing the SLA Category due date rules populating the due date on a service order.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SLADueDateOptionsSetup.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Custom_Fields_now_available_in_7.1&amp;diff=6448</id>
		<title>Custom Fields now available in 7.1</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Custom_Fields_now_available_in_7.1&amp;diff=6448"/>
		<updated>2020-02-28T18:55:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: covert videoflash to embedvideo&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;In SME 7.1 you have the ability to add custom tabs with custom fields to your records. You can call these fields any name you want and choose between many field types. In the search window you can sort by the custom fields just like all the other fields in SME. You can also apply an access level to each of the fields to restrict user groups from seeing the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch the video below to learn more, or click Custom Fields to read about setting them up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ev:youtube| Del59utdPR8}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Customers&amp;diff=6447</id>
		<title>Customers</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Customers&amp;diff=6447"/>
		<updated>2020-02-28T17:58:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: covert videoflash to embedvideo&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#ev:youtube|Ybxk061nD60}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;There are a couple ways to create a new customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#  Select New &amp;gt; Customer.&lt;br /&gt;
#  The Customer module will open with an empty customer record.&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the record and click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another way to create a new customer:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Details and Settings Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this tab, you can track the site, billing and mailing address using the tabs along the left.  All of these addresses can be the same or they could all be different. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;If the site, billing and mailing information is the same:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Site&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab with the company and address information.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Set From Site&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; (arrow in image below)&lt;br /&gt;
# The address from the Site tab will populate the Billing tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Mailing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Set From Site&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# The address from the Site tab will populate the Mailing tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:BillingSetFromSite.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In some cases you may have one customer you are working with and you have multiple job sites for them. You can create a parent child relationship.  If you do this, you could look up the parent company and find all of the related “child” companies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;To create a parent – child company structure:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, create a company record for the “parent” company. Usually the information on the Site and Billing tab for the parent is going to be the same. When that is created, you can then create the &amp;quot;child&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a company record for the “child” company.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Site&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, enter the job site information.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the “child” record, select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select Billing Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the window that displays, select the billing or “parent” company.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click S&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ave&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the &amp;quot;child&amp;quot; company record.&lt;br /&gt;
# Notice the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Full Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; for the “child” company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;To see all “child’ companies for the “parent” company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the “parent” company.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Associated Companies&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# All related “child” companies will be listed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;To add a contact to a company record&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click your cursor in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contact&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
# Type the contact name.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tab to the next field and the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contact Editor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; will display. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the contact information.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ContactEditor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Syncing Customer to QB&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Review the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[SQLink]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; page to determine the best settings for syncing customer names from SME to QB Company and Customer name fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink#Billing_Name_Options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Phone Number syncing to QB Company&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When entering a new customer in SME, the first and third phone number fields sync to QuickBooks Phone and FAX phone numbers as shown in the image below. Even if you change the phone label in SME, it still will sync the first and third phone number fields. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomerPhoneNumberSync.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Leaving Site Address Blank&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you leave the Site Address blank in SME, after your sync with QuickBooks, the billing address will populate the site tab. To keep the billing address out of the site tab, put a &amp;quot;.&amp;quot; in the address1 field on the site tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;click here for screenshots: http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink_FAQ#Customer_Site_Address_is_populating_with_Billing_Address_After_Sync&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Edits to SME Customers syncing to QB&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you edit a customer in SME, the customer will be set to sync to QB on the next sync. You will see the Export to QB flag checked. Once synced, the flag will be cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Updating Site and Billing Address in SME&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To update existing open orders and open invoices with the new address, all other users must be logged out of SME. Then you can check Propagate and save the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PropagateToOrders.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If other users aren&amp;#039;t logged out of SME, the you will get this message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Propagate_SingleUserMode.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Mailing Tab&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you fill out an address on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Mailing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab and check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Use on Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, then on any invoice created for that customer, the mailing address will populate the Site tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MailingTab_UseOnInvoices.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When a work order is invoiced, the Site tab shows the info from the Mailing tab because &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;use on invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MailingTab_showOnInvoiceSiteTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Fields in the Customer Record - Details and Settings tab&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Account #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Based on the settings your SME Administrator setup, this field is auto populated when you save the company record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Balance&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Displays the amount due for all open invoices for the customer. This is a calculation and it is not an editable field. If you have parent/child customer structure, the child/site customer balance is added to the parent balance and the child balance is 0.00&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Salesperson&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Select from the salesperson in the Salesperson drop down. The names in this drop down are determined by your SME Administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Division&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The drop down can be customized by your SME Administrator. Once you collect this information for your customers, you can sort your customers by division.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This is a text field to type a quick message that is visible here on the Details and Settings tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Type the customers website address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Warehouse location for customer equipment in your warehouse. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; - Here is information about Customer Warhouses: http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=Warehouses#Customer_Warehouses&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Messages&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The messages box contains a list of emailed notifications, as well as calculated data based on current information. For example if account is past due, if maintenance/warranty has expired, when the next activity is scheduled for the customer, etc.  Clearing the message clears the notification messages, but the calculated messages are always there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Account Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this tab you will find your customer’s account information. Depending on the permissions set by your SME Administrator, this tab may be hidden from view. At the bottom of the tab, find the customer’s balance due.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Customer_AccountsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;MsoTableGrid&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border-collapse: collapse; border: none; mso-yfti-tbllook: 1184; mso-padding-alt: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt; mso-border-insidev: none&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;mso-yfti-irow: 0; mso-yfti-firstrow: yes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 126.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;169&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Terms&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 531.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;709&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Select the default billing terms for the customer. When creating an invoice, you can always change the terms.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;mso-yfti-irow: 1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 126.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;169&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Purchase Order Required&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 531.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;709&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
If checked, any service or install order created for the customer will require a PO# to be entered on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;mso-yfti-irow: 2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 126.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;169&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tax ID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 531.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;709&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Type in the customers Tax ID&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;mso-yfti-irow: 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 126.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;169&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Finance Charge&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 531.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;709&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the finance charge. Click&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Late Fees / Finance Charges]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; for more information&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;mso-yfti-irow: 4&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 126.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;169&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Source&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 531.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;709&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the source of this customer&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;mso-yfti-irow: 5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 126.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;169&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Printed Comments&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 531.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;709&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
If this field is on a report, the text typed in the field will display on the report (e.g. invoice, orders)&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;mso-yfti-irow: 6&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 126.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;169&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Last Service&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 531.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;709&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Date populated based on the latest Date Opened field on the companies work orders. The Date Opened field is auto-populated with the date you created the order, but it can be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;mso-yfti-irow: 7&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 126.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;169&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Since&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 531.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;709&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
The date field is auto-populated with the date you created the company record. You can change the date as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;mso-yfti-irow: 8&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 126.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;169&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Business Type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 531.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;709&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
You can select the type of business. This drop down list can be customized by your SME Administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;mso-yfti-irow: 9; height: .25in&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 126.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt; height: .25in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;169&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Business Hours&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 531.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt; height: .25in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;709&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
As a reference, type the business hours.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;mso-yfti-irow: 10; height: 3.5pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 126.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt; height: 3.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;169&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Primary Technician&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 531.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt; height: 3.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;709&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
When you add labor to an order for this company, the primary technician will populate the Technician field on the Labor Editor. You can select another technician in the Labor Editor as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;mso-yfti-irow: 11&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 126.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;169&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Secondary Technician&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 531.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;709&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Select a secondary technician. In an order for the customer, you can reference the secondary technician field.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;mso-yfti-irow: 12&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 126.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;169&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Customer Message on Past Due&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 531.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;709&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
The following message will populate the message field on Details and Settings tab: “Account is past due”&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;mso-yfti-irow: 13&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 126.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;169&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Class&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 531.9pt; border: none; border-bottom: solid black 1.0pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; mso-border-bottom-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-bottom-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;709&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
If you are syncing SME with QuickBooks, this drop down should match your Class list in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;mso-yfti-irow: 14; mso-yfti-lastrow: yes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 126.9pt; border: none; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;169&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Converted from Sales on&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 531.9pt; border: none; mso-border-top-alt: solid black .5pt; mso-border-top-themecolor: text1; padding: 0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;709&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Auto-populated date showing when you converted the company from a Lead to a Customer. No date will display if the company was created directly in the customer module. This date cannot be edited.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;At the bottom of the Account tab, you will see balance information. If you don&amp;#039;t see this, then it was hidden based on your User Group settings. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AccountCurrent.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Net 30&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Net 60&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Net 90&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - These field shows balances that are 30, 60 or 90 days past the due date &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The due date for account calculations can be based on the Invoice Due Date or on the Invoice Date. This is determined by your setting in &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;System&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The setting is &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Base Past Due on Invoice Date, not Due Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Deposit on Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This shows the total deposits entered for a customer in SME. SME Deposits stay in SME and do not sync to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rates Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rates tab is where you can set up special pricing for the customer and tax information.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Customer_RatesTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 1.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Price Book&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.7in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;739&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Select the price book for the customer here and all pricing on orders will be based on the rules set up in the price book.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 1.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Premium Hour&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.7in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;739&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter an amount you want to charge the customer for every order.&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;It will show in the&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Premium&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Totals&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab in the order.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 1.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Trip Charge&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.7in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;739&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the trip charge amount you want to populate every order for the customer. It will show in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Trip Charge&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Totals&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab in the order.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 1.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tax Group/Code&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.7in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;739&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Select the appropriate tax group for the customer. Your SME Administrator will set these up based on your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 1.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tax Exempt&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.7in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;739&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Check for your tax exempt customers.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 1.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Excise Tax Rate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.7in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;739&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the excise tax rate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;rgb(227, 108, 10)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**NOTE**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt; In order for this tax to be calculated on an order, your SME Administrator must check “Apply Excise Tax” in the Setup module &amp;gt; Company &amp;gt; Order .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 1.45in; border: medium none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Calculate Excise Tax&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.7in; border: medium none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;739&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Check here for SME to calculate the Excise Tax on orders&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 1.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SLA Category&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.7in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;739&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set SLA Category for your customer. Any order or itemized invoice you create for the customer will have the SLA category on the record. [[SLA Category]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Install Info Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab gives you an overview of the customer site. You may have individual maintenance contracts for the customer as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:InstallInfoTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;MsoTableGrid&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border-collapse: collapse; border: medium none&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 135.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;181&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Installer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 558.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;745&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Technician that did the install&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 135.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;181&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warranty Exp.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 558.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;745&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Set the date for warranty expiration. If “Warn on Expiration” is checked and it is past the date, the following message will populate the message field on Details and Settings: “Warranty expired: x/x/20xx”&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 135.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;181&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Maintenance Exp.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 558.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;745&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Set the date for maintenance expiration. If “Warn on Expiration” is checked and it is past the date, the following message will populate the message field on Details and Settings: “Maintenance expired: x/x/20xx”&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 135.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;181&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Minimum Prepaid Services&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 558.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;745&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Set the minimum prepaid services required for this customer.&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;SME will compare the amount here to the amount entered on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Activity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prepaid Services&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. When below the minimum level, the following message will populate the message field on Details and Settings: “Minimum level of prepaid services reached x/x/20xx”&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 135.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;181&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Minimum Prepaid Hours&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 558.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;745&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Set the minimum prepaid hours required for this customer.&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;SME will compare the amount here to the amount entered on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Activity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prepaid Hours&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. When below the minimum level, the following message will populate the message field on Details and Settings: “Minimum level of prepaid hours reached x/xx/20xx”&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 135.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;181&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;System&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 558.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;745&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Your SME Administrator may have customized this field. Choose the system associated with this customer.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 135.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;181&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LD Carrier&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 558.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;745&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Long Distance Carrier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 135.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;181&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Maintenance Costs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 558.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;745&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Type the maintenance cost for the customer. This is not linked to a maintenance contract.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clear&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Lists Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Customer Lists tab provides access to more tabs. Here you can access all contacts related to the customer and a list of the customer equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; If you aren&amp;#039;t seeing all these tabs under Customer Lists, check your User group settings on the Tab Settings tab. (http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Groups#Tab_Settings_Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomerListsTAb.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
§  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contacts&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Add and edit company contacts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
§  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Access equipment at the customer site (also use the Customer Equipment module for more functionality)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
§  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IP Addresses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Hide this tab if it isn’t relevant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
§  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Phone Lines&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Hide this tab if it isn’t relevant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
§  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Systems&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Add your customer’s systems. Hide this tab if it isn’t relevant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
§  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Subcontractors&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Associate a subcontractor using this tab. It is used as reference. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contacts – Add new contacts&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Lists tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contacts&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the Contact Editor that opens, fill out the contact information.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contact Pref&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – select their preferred contact method (list to be customized by your SME Administrator&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contact role&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – select the contacts role within their organization (list to be customized by your SME Administrator)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Web Access Password&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If you are using WebConnect with SME, this is where you would assign the contact a login to WebConnect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer History Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the Customer Activity tab, you can access all order history, invoice history, payment history and more. Depending on the permissions set by your SME Administrator, you may not see all the tabs shown in the screenshot below. (Hiding and showing tabs in User Groups: http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Groups#Tab_Settings_Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomerHIstoryTab.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Service tab you can access all service order history for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
*  Select an order and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quick View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to open the order in another window.&lt;br /&gt;
* Double click on the order to jump to the order in the Service Order module.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on the column headers to sort orders.&lt;br /&gt;
* Drag and drop the column headers to change the column order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Right click on any order and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export to Excel&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to open the data in Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
* Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Open&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Closed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoiced&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;All&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to change the orders displayed based on the status selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:byStatus.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Install&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Install tab is similar to the Service tab. The only difference is it lists Install Orders for the company selected. See instructions for Service above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Recurring Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View all recurring orders for the customer. Set up new recurring orders in the Recurring Orders module, or by clicking &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on this tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Access all invoices for the customer. &lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the column headers to sort by column.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Open&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Closed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;All&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to change the invoices displayed based on the status selected.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select an invoice and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quick View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to open the invoice in a new window. This allows you to stay in the Customer module.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select an invoice and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to jump to the invoice in the Invoicing module.&lt;br /&gt;
# Right click on any invoice and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export to Excel&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to open data in Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;MsoNormal&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b style=&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*NOTE*&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; This tab may be hidden from your view based on permissions.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt; This tab may be hidden from your view based on permissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Itemized Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – brings you to the Invoicing module with a new itemized invoice open for the customer. An itemized invoice isn’t linked to an order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Combined Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – brings you to the Invoicing module with a new combined invoice open for the customer. &lt;br /&gt;
Payments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;On the Payments tab you can access all customer payment history. This tab may be hidden from your view based on permissions set by your SME Administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Select a payment and click Quick View to open the payment in another window. This keeps you in the Customer module.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the column headers to sort orders.&lt;br /&gt;
# Double click on the payment to jump to the payment in the Payment module.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag and drop the column headers to change the column order.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select Payment, Credit or All to change the payments displayed based on the status selected.&lt;br /&gt;
# Right click on any payment, select Export to Excel to open the data in Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Proposals &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Proposals tab, you can access proposal history for your customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Double click on the proposal to jump to the Proposal module.&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the proposal and click Quick View to open the proposal in a new window. This keeps you in the Customer module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;contacts &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Access all maintenance contacts for your customer here.  Click New to create a new Maintenance Contract for the customer or select a contract on the tab and click Edit to edit an existing contract.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Recurring&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Access all recurring invoices for your customer in this tab. Click New to create a new recurring invoice or click Edit to edit an existing contract.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Deposits &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To record deposits customers made&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select how they paid in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Pay Type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; section.&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Payment Amount&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and remaining fields.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The deposit is recorded for the customer. You can see the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Deposit on Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the Account tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DepositOnAccount.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The deposit can be applied to invoices created for the customer. When creating an invoice for the customer, you will be prompted to type the amount of deposit you want to apply to an invoice (circled in image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DepositApply.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Repair&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a work order was created for the customer to repair some of their equipment, this tab will list the equipment to repair. Double click on the item and you can see what which equipment, the repair requested and repair performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Adding Columns to the tabs&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to add additional columns to the grids on the tabs under Customer History, you can right click in the grid on the tab and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Columns to Grid&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. In the window that opens, check the fields you want to view and click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AddColumnsToCustomerHistoryTabGrids.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To go back to the original columns, right click in the grid and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reset Grid&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Clear Grid&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; from the menu, all the columns will be hidden. You can click in the upper left corner of the grid to choose which individual columns to add back in (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AddColumnsBackIn.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Associated Companies Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have parent/child relationships set-up between your companies, you can access this tab on the parent company to see all child companies. See the Details and Settings portion of this document to see how to set up parent-child relationship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AssociatedCompanies.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notifications Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set email or pop-up notification for your customer in this tab.  Your SME Administrator will create the types of notifications that you can set for your customers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your administrator can select which modules these notifications are available for and what type of action taken prompts the notification (e.g. Adding, Editing, Deleting, or Closing the record in the customer module.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       On the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Notifications&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Notification.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Notification Type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. If this drop down field is empty, your SME Administrator hasn’t set up any notifications for this module yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Send Email To&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and type the email address for the person that wants to be notified with activity for this customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Alert User&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to set a pop-up window to open when user and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Message&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. In the window that opens type the message you want your user to see.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;MsoListParagraphCxSpLast&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin-left: 0.25in; text-indent: -0.25in;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b style=&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size: 11pt; line-height: 115%; font-family: &amp;amp;quot;Calibri&amp;amp;quot;,&amp;amp;quot;sans-serif&amp;amp;quot;; color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;**NOTE**&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size: 11pt; line-height: 115%; font-family: &amp;amp;quot;Calibri&amp;amp;quot;,&amp;amp;quot;sans-serif&amp;amp;quot;;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; if you don’t see the Notifications tab, then it was hidden from your view based on your user group permissions.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Move existing site to new billing company ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are syncing SME with QuickBooks, see this video to move customers as job sites under another Billable or Parent customer.  This would be done in the case that job sites are first imported into QuickBooks and then you need to move them as job sites. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Do not move customers that have a history of invoices and payments.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;ah7Nn6jUFlw&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you cannot move the site to a new billing customer in QuickBooks because of invoice and payment history, then you will need to create a new customer site and link it to the new billing/parent customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to manage current orders/info and move to the new management company.&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Company Names:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Old Billing / Management Company = D&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;New Billing / Management company = E&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Old Site/Job/Customer =  ABC (Change to ABC – D during the steps below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;New Site/Job/Customer = ABC – E&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          In QB&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;o   Locate the ‘Site/Job/Customer’ under the current Management Company – ‘D’ parent&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;o   Add a suffix to the name – ABC Site – D (makes this Site/Job/Customer unique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;o   Sync – this will set the name in SME to ABC – D&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          Create a new Customer in SME or QB called ‘ABC – E’ for the location – If in SME set the Billing to the ‘E’ parent&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;o   Locate existing Recurring Orders or Invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;o   Click the Magnify glass next to the Site Name and browse for the new Site/Customer record.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;o   You can also move the customer equipment from ABC – D to ABC – E from the Customer Equipment module. (right click on the equipment and select &amp;quot;Move to another site)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Merge Customers ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can merge customer history from one customer into another customer in SME. Once the history is moved, the customer record you moved history &amp;#039;&amp;#039;from&amp;#039;&amp;#039; can be set to inactive.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:StartingcusotmerMerge.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Go to the customer you want to merge into another customer, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Merge with&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. (This is the customer you want to get rid of and merge history into another customer, in the image above it is Willows School.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Customer_Actions_MergeWith.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- In the search window that opens, select the customer you want to move the history to&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SelectCustomerToMergeInto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Your window will stay on the original customer. Check out the history tab and the service &amp;amp; install history should be empty. Set the Customer to inactive by clicking &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Set to Inactive&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and make sure &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export to QuickBooks&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is unchecked. You could also delete the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomerMerge_HistoryMovedAway.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Go to the other customer you merged history into&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Look at the history tab and you should see the orders from the other customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MergedHistory.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- If you want to update the name and address on the moved service orders that are still &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;open&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, you can click&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; propagate to orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; from the site and billing tab on the customer you moved history to.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PropagateAddressToMergedHistory.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== If Merging Quickbooks Customer === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; When merging customers we recommend you do as follows: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Merge the customer in QB – This will move all of the info to the merge customer and will set the merged customer in SME to Inactive. All historical records will remain tied to the inactive customer.&lt;br /&gt;
*Sync – this will record the QB action and will set the merged customer in SME to Inactive.&lt;br /&gt;
*Merge the customer in SME – This will move all of the historical info to the merge customer and will leave the merged customer as inactive. (You can delete the customer once it has been merged). Note: The only change to historical data in SME is the Billing/Parent UID is replaced on the merged records. All address info, etc. remains as originally entered.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Custom_Tabs_and_Fields&amp;diff=6446</id>
		<title>Custom Tabs and Fields</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Custom_Tabs_and_Fields&amp;diff=6446"/>
		<updated>2020-02-28T17:50:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;In SME 7.1 you have the ability to add custom tabs with custom fields to your records. You can call these fields any name you want and choose between many field types. In the search window you can sort by the custom fields just like all the other fields in SME. You can also apply an access level to each of the fields to restrict user groups from seeing the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomTabsFields.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields can be created in Leads, Customer, Maintenance Contracts, Customer Equipment, Service, Install, Invoices, and Users. Once custom fields are created in those modules, a tab called &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom tabs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; will be created. On this tab, you can add multiple custom tabs containing custom fields as shown in the image above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View the video below for an overview or read through the guide for more information about setting up custom fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ev:youtube|Del59utdPR8}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Types of Custom Fields ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt; border-style: solid; border-color: windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 1.45in; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: solid solid solid none; border-color: windowtext windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 220.5pt; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Definition&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: solid solid solid none; border-color: windowtext windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 207.9pt; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Sample&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Boolean&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;True or false field. Check the box for true. Leave the box unchecked for false.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Boolean.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Button&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This requires custom code to respond to the button.   For example you can add code that runs some other program when the button is pressed.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Button.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Currency&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Uses the default currency set by Windows language and settings, for example $.   Type numbers in the field or click in the field to use the calculator.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Currency.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Date&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Click in the field and select a date from the calendar.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:date.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DateTime&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter both date and time. Select a date from the calendar. Use   to increase or decrease time.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:DateTime.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Integer&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter numbers only.  Cannot enter a decimal. Limit to 9 digits&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Integer.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;LargeInt&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter numbers only.  Cannot enter a decimal.  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:LargeInt.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Memo&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Used for a paragraph or large block of text versus one line of text.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Numeric(decimal)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter a number with decimals. (the field length needs to be &amp;gt; 5)&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:NumericDecimal.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;PickList&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drop down list.   The drop down list can be configured with an unlimited number of selections.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter the drop down list by clicking in the PickList column. [[Image:EditPickList.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Picklist.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;String&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Used for a single line of text.  For a block or paragraph of text, use Memo.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:string.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Time&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Time field&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Time.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create Custom Fields ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.Go to Utilities module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
The Custom Table Designer window will open. This is where you will select what module you are adding the tab and fields to. You will assign a name for the tab and layout the custom fields on the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field, select the module you want to add a new custom tab to.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tab Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field, enter a name for the custom tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
Now the tab is created, you can start adding the fields to the new tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.       Click [[File:PlusSign.jpg]] at the bottom of the Custom Table Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddNewField.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10.   Notice a line was added to the Design tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:NewFieldRow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11.   In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Field Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; enter the name of the field. This is the database name and has the following requirements: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--- &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; enter any special characters &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Such as: !,@,#,$,%,^,1,2,3&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in these fields, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;only letters a-z &amp;amp; A-Z&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--- &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; have any spaces between words in the Field Name column. The Field Description is the name that shows on the custom tab and the field description can have spaces.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;---&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; change the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; once you have started to enter data into the field in the module. If you make changes to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; the link to the original table field and/or data will be broken. (You can restore by reverting the type and/or name to the original state). If you change the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; you will encounter issues since the table will contain field values of a type different than that selected or the field name will not match that in the underlying table. If the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; are modified SME will crash when clicking on the module for the custom tables. You can change the description, but &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; change the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The description is what shows on the custom tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12. In the  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Field Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column, enter the name as you want it to show on the custom tab. This name can be changed if needed later.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13.   Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Field Type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. (see the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;do not&amp;#039;&amp;#039; notes under Field Name above)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14.   Place the field on the custom tab using the following columns:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Left&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – number of pixels from the left side of the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Top&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Number of pixels from the top of the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Height&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Number of pixels high the cell is.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Width&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Number of pixels wide the cell is.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;15.  Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Examples.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WidthExamples.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preview what the fields will look like by clicking the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab in the Custom Table Designer window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Preview.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see the custom tab in the module, close and reopen SME. Go the module and select the Custom Tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rearrange Fields on Custom Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
Another way to rearrange the position of custom fields on custom tabs is to go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Views&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, select the custom tab. Drag the fields in the position you want them in and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save Layout&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in lower left corner. Once the layout is saved, you will see the Left and  Top column will be updated on the Design tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:RearrangeFieldsOnCustomTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Tab Order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you create more than one custom tab for a module, you can determine the order of the tabs. In the Custom Table Designer window, locate the Tab Order field. Enter 1 in the tab you want on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
In the example below, the VIP Info tab has 1 in tab order so it will be on the left. The Standard tab has 2 in the tab order so it will be on the right. If there was another tab, we would enter 3 to have it to the right of the standard tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomTabOrderExample.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Tab - Admin Access ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Custom Table Designer window, there is a checkbox for Admin Access. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:admiAccess.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is checked, then the tab is only visible to SME users assigned to user groups where User Is An &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Administrator&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked (image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UserGroup_IsAdmin.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit Custom Fields ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Tabs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the custom tab containing the fields you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Add more fields by clicking [[File:PlusSign.jpg]] at the bottom or make changes to existing fields.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab to preview your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Close and reopen SME. Go to the custom tab in the module to see your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Field Access Level ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can assign an access level to each custom field. Only users that are authorized to see that level can access the custom field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone with access 0 can see everything, access 1 would only see fields with access 1 or higher, user group access 2 would not see 0 and 1 fields and would see 2 and higher, etc. Access levels can go to 5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Assign SME user groups an access levels&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click User Groups.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to locate the user group you want to apply an access level to.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the Administrative Clearances tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Locate the User Field Access Level field in the right column.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Enter the access level (1-5)&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Assign an access level to the custom fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Custom Tabs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the tab containing the fields you need to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Access Level&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column (circled below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FieldAccessLevel.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Enter the access level for the custom field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Click Save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;*NOTE* Access levels are fixed, so you cannot allow a user group to see fields with access levels 1, 5, and 10 but no others.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Form Code ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Form code is entered in the customer and then on the work order.  (Image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomerFormCode.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tabs matching this form code and the tabs with no form code and will show on the work order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You assign the form code to the custom tab (circled in image below). Form codes can be numbers or text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AssignFormCode.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;For example you have a custom tab created for Home Depot customers and you assigned the Form Code of HD. You set the form code on the home depot billing company and every time you create an order for a customer with HD as billing, it sets that form code on the service order and only shows the custom tabs with the HD form code AND any custom tab with a blank form code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Table Editor Fields Locking Up ==&lt;br /&gt;
If the Custom Table window is locking you out of some of the fields such as the Description or Top columns, follow these steps to correct the issue:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Log out of SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Go to your \High5software\sme5.exe  folder (you can access by rightclicking on your shortcut and &amp;#039;Open file Location(Win7) - or Properties&amp;gt;Find Target (XP))&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Search on the file dlgcDesign.ini &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Delete the file anywhere it comes up. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Log into SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Then try editing again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Fields in TechPortal ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want the custom fields you create in Service Orders or Install Orders to show in TechPortal you need to check Show In TP.  Once checked, the tab the fields are on will show in TechPortal and all the fields with that checked will show on the tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomTabsInTP.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you create a custom tab in service orders called “Tech”, all the fields on that tab with “Show in TP” checked will show on the detail tab circled in image below. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TechCustomField.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Fields in Customer populate Service Order etc. ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the same custom field in a customer record and in a service order, then when you create a service order for the customer, the custom field will be populated by what is in the field in the customer record. The value in the customer custom field will be passed into the service order custom field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When setting up the custom field, in order for the data in the field to pass to the service order the fields have to have the exact same Field Name, Field Type, Field Description, Field Length and if it is a pick list, it must have the same values in the pick list column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomTable_SameFieldName.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Then go to the customer record and fill out the custom field. Going forward, when you create a service order for the customer, the value in the customer custom field will pass to the service order custom fiel. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomFieldFollowtoOrder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Values can pass from one record to another in the following scenarios:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customer to Service Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customer to Install Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customer to Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lead to Customer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Proposal to Service Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Proposal to Install Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Service Order to Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Install Order to Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== As Details Checkbox ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AsDetails.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
When setting up a new custom tab you can check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;As Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the custom tab will display under &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, not Customer Tab tab. In each field on a Custom Details tab you can enter multiple entries.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomDetailsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tech Certificates ==&lt;br /&gt;
New feature as of 8.1.5.106&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you create additional fields for technician and subcontractor certifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TechCertCustom.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TechCertForm.jpg]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Custom_Tabs_and_Fields&amp;diff=6445</id>
		<title>Custom Tabs and Fields</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Custom_Tabs_and_Fields&amp;diff=6445"/>
		<updated>2020-02-28T17:49:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;In SME 7.1 you have the ability to add custom tabs with custom fields to your records. You can call these fields any name you want and choose between many field types. In the search window you can sort by the custom fields just like all the other fields in SME. You can also apply an access level to each of the fields to restrict user groups from seeing the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomTabsFields.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields can be created in Leads, Customer, Maintenance Contracts, Customer Equipment, Service, Install, Invoices, and Users. Once custom fields are created in those modules, a tab called &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom tabs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; will be created. On this tab, you can add multiple custom tabs containing custom fields as shown in the image above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View the video below for an overview or read through the guide for more information about setting up custom fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;embedvideo service=&amp;quot;youtube&amp;quot;&amp;gt;https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Del59utdPR8&amp;lt;/embedvideo&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ev:youtube|Del59utdPR8}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Types of Custom Fields ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt; border-style: solid; border-color: windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 1.45in; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: solid solid solid none; border-color: windowtext windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 220.5pt; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Definition&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: solid solid solid none; border-color: windowtext windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 207.9pt; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Sample&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Boolean&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;True or false field. Check the box for true. Leave the box unchecked for false.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Boolean.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Button&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This requires custom code to respond to the button.   For example you can add code that runs some other program when the button is pressed.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Button.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Currency&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Uses the default currency set by Windows language and settings, for example $.   Type numbers in the field or click in the field to use the calculator.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Currency.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Date&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Click in the field and select a date from the calendar.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:date.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DateTime&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter both date and time. Select a date from the calendar. Use   to increase or decrease time.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:DateTime.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Integer&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter numbers only.  Cannot enter a decimal. Limit to 9 digits&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Integer.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;LargeInt&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter numbers only.  Cannot enter a decimal.  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:LargeInt.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Memo&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Used for a paragraph or large block of text versus one line of text.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Numeric(decimal)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter a number with decimals. (the field length needs to be &amp;gt; 5)&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:NumericDecimal.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;PickList&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drop down list.   The drop down list can be configured with an unlimited number of selections.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter the drop down list by clicking in the PickList column. [[Image:EditPickList.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Picklist.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;String&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Used for a single line of text.  For a block or paragraph of text, use Memo.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:string.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Time&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Time field&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Time.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create Custom Fields ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.Go to Utilities module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
The Custom Table Designer window will open. This is where you will select what module you are adding the tab and fields to. You will assign a name for the tab and layout the custom fields on the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field, select the module you want to add a new custom tab to.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tab Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field, enter a name for the custom tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
Now the tab is created, you can start adding the fields to the new tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.       Click [[File:PlusSign.jpg]] at the bottom of the Custom Table Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddNewField.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10.   Notice a line was added to the Design tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:NewFieldRow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11.   In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Field Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; enter the name of the field. This is the database name and has the following requirements: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--- &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; enter any special characters &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Such as: !,@,#,$,%,^,1,2,3&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in these fields, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;only letters a-z &amp;amp; A-Z&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--- &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; have any spaces between words in the Field Name column. The Field Description is the name that shows on the custom tab and the field description can have spaces.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;---&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; change the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; once you have started to enter data into the field in the module. If you make changes to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; the link to the original table field and/or data will be broken. (You can restore by reverting the type and/or name to the original state). If you change the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; you will encounter issues since the table will contain field values of a type different than that selected or the field name will not match that in the underlying table. If the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; are modified SME will crash when clicking on the module for the custom tables. You can change the description, but &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; change the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The description is what shows on the custom tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12. In the  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Field Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column, enter the name as you want it to show on the custom tab. This name can be changed if needed later.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13.   Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Field Type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. (see the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;do not&amp;#039;&amp;#039; notes under Field Name above)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14.   Place the field on the custom tab using the following columns:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Left&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – number of pixels from the left side of the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Top&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Number of pixels from the top of the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Height&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Number of pixels high the cell is.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Width&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Number of pixels wide the cell is.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;15.  Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Examples.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WidthExamples.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preview what the fields will look like by clicking the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab in the Custom Table Designer window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Preview.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see the custom tab in the module, close and reopen SME. Go the module and select the Custom Tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rearrange Fields on Custom Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
Another way to rearrange the position of custom fields on custom tabs is to go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Views&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, select the custom tab. Drag the fields in the position you want them in and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save Layout&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in lower left corner. Once the layout is saved, you will see the Left and  Top column will be updated on the Design tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:RearrangeFieldsOnCustomTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Tab Order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you create more than one custom tab for a module, you can determine the order of the tabs. In the Custom Table Designer window, locate the Tab Order field. Enter 1 in the tab you want on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
In the example below, the VIP Info tab has 1 in tab order so it will be on the left. The Standard tab has 2 in the tab order so it will be on the right. If there was another tab, we would enter 3 to have it to the right of the standard tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomTabOrderExample.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Tab - Admin Access ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Custom Table Designer window, there is a checkbox for Admin Access. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:admiAccess.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is checked, then the tab is only visible to SME users assigned to user groups where User Is An &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Administrator&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked (image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UserGroup_IsAdmin.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit Custom Fields ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Tabs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the custom tab containing the fields you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Add more fields by clicking [[File:PlusSign.jpg]] at the bottom or make changes to existing fields.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab to preview your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Close and reopen SME. Go to the custom tab in the module to see your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Field Access Level ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can assign an access level to each custom field. Only users that are authorized to see that level can access the custom field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone with access 0 can see everything, access 1 would only see fields with access 1 or higher, user group access 2 would not see 0 and 1 fields and would see 2 and higher, etc. Access levels can go to 5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Assign SME user groups an access levels&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click User Groups.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to locate the user group you want to apply an access level to.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the Administrative Clearances tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Locate the User Field Access Level field in the right column.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Enter the access level (1-5)&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Assign an access level to the custom fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Custom Tabs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the tab containing the fields you need to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Access Level&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column (circled below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FieldAccessLevel.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Enter the access level for the custom field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Click Save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;*NOTE* Access levels are fixed, so you cannot allow a user group to see fields with access levels 1, 5, and 10 but no others.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Form Code ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Form code is entered in the customer and then on the work order.  (Image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomerFormCode.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tabs matching this form code and the tabs with no form code and will show on the work order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You assign the form code to the custom tab (circled in image below). Form codes can be numbers or text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AssignFormCode.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;For example you have a custom tab created for Home Depot customers and you assigned the Form Code of HD. You set the form code on the home depot billing company and every time you create an order for a customer with HD as billing, it sets that form code on the service order and only shows the custom tabs with the HD form code AND any custom tab with a blank form code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Table Editor Fields Locking Up ==&lt;br /&gt;
If the Custom Table window is locking you out of some of the fields such as the Description or Top columns, follow these steps to correct the issue:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Log out of SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Go to your \High5software\sme5.exe  folder (you can access by rightclicking on your shortcut and &amp;#039;Open file Location(Win7) - or Properties&amp;gt;Find Target (XP))&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Search on the file dlgcDesign.ini &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Delete the file anywhere it comes up. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Log into SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Then try editing again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Fields in TechPortal ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want the custom fields you create in Service Orders or Install Orders to show in TechPortal you need to check Show In TP.  Once checked, the tab the fields are on will show in TechPortal and all the fields with that checked will show on the tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomTabsInTP.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you create a custom tab in service orders called “Tech”, all the fields on that tab with “Show in TP” checked will show on the detail tab circled in image below. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TechCustomField.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Fields in Customer populate Service Order etc. ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the same custom field in a customer record and in a service order, then when you create a service order for the customer, the custom field will be populated by what is in the field in the customer record. The value in the customer custom field will be passed into the service order custom field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When setting up the custom field, in order for the data in the field to pass to the service order the fields have to have the exact same Field Name, Field Type, Field Description, Field Length and if it is a pick list, it must have the same values in the pick list column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomTable_SameFieldName.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Then go to the customer record and fill out the custom field. Going forward, when you create a service order for the customer, the value in the customer custom field will pass to the service order custom fiel. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomFieldFollowtoOrder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Values can pass from one record to another in the following scenarios:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customer to Service Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customer to Install Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customer to Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lead to Customer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Proposal to Service Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Proposal to Install Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Service Order to Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Install Order to Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== As Details Checkbox ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AsDetails.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
When setting up a new custom tab you can check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;As Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the custom tab will display under &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, not Customer Tab tab. In each field on a Custom Details tab you can enter multiple entries.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomDetailsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tech Certificates ==&lt;br /&gt;
New feature as of 8.1.5.106&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you create additional fields for technician and subcontractor certifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TechCertCustom.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TechCertForm.jpg]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Custom_Tabs_and_Fields&amp;diff=6444</id>
		<title>Custom Tabs and Fields</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Custom_Tabs_and_Fields&amp;diff=6444"/>
		<updated>2020-02-28T17:48:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: covert videoflash to embedvideo&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;In SME 7.1 you have the ability to add custom tabs with custom fields to your records. You can call these fields any name you want and choose between many field types. In the search window you can sort by the custom fields just like all the other fields in SME. You can also apply an access level to each of the fields to restrict user groups from seeing the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomTabsFields.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields can be created in Leads, Customer, Maintenance Contracts, Customer Equipment, Service, Install, Invoices, and Users. Once custom fields are created in those modules, a tab called &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom tabs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; will be created. On this tab, you can add multiple custom tabs containing custom fields as shown in the image above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View the video below for an overview or read through the guide for more information about setting up custom fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;embedvideo service=&amp;quot;youtube&amp;quot;&amp;gt;https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Del59utdPR8&amp;lt;/embedvideo&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Types of Custom Fields ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt; border-style: solid; border-color: windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 1.45in; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: solid solid solid none; border-color: windowtext windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 220.5pt; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Definition&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: solid solid solid none; border-color: windowtext windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 207.9pt; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Sample&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Boolean&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;True or false field. Check the box for true. Leave the box unchecked for false.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Boolean.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Button&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This requires custom code to respond to the button.   For example you can add code that runs some other program when the button is pressed.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Button.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Currency&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Uses the default currency set by Windows language and settings, for example $.   Type numbers in the field or click in the field to use the calculator.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Currency.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Date&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Click in the field and select a date from the calendar.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:date.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DateTime&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter both date and time. Select a date from the calendar. Use   to increase or decrease time.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:DateTime.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Integer&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter numbers only.  Cannot enter a decimal. Limit to 9 digits&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Integer.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;LargeInt&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter numbers only.  Cannot enter a decimal.  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:LargeInt.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Memo&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Used for a paragraph or large block of text versus one line of text.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Numeric(decimal)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter a number with decimals. (the field length needs to be &amp;gt; 5)&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:NumericDecimal.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;PickList&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drop down list.   The drop down list can be configured with an unlimited number of selections.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter the drop down list by clicking in the PickList column. [[Image:EditPickList.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Picklist.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;String&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Used for a single line of text.  For a block or paragraph of text, use Memo.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:string.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Time&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Time field&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Time.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create Custom Fields ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.Go to Utilities module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
The Custom Table Designer window will open. This is where you will select what module you are adding the tab and fields to. You will assign a name for the tab and layout the custom fields on the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field, select the module you want to add a new custom tab to.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tab Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field, enter a name for the custom tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
Now the tab is created, you can start adding the fields to the new tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.       Click [[File:PlusSign.jpg]] at the bottom of the Custom Table Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddNewField.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10.   Notice a line was added to the Design tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:NewFieldRow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11.   In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Field Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; enter the name of the field. This is the database name and has the following requirements: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--- &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; enter any special characters &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Such as: !,@,#,$,%,^,1,2,3&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in these fields, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;only letters a-z &amp;amp; A-Z&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--- &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; have any spaces between words in the Field Name column. The Field Description is the name that shows on the custom tab and the field description can have spaces.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;---&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; change the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; once you have started to enter data into the field in the module. If you make changes to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; the link to the original table field and/or data will be broken. (You can restore by reverting the type and/or name to the original state). If you change the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; you will encounter issues since the table will contain field values of a type different than that selected or the field name will not match that in the underlying table. If the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; are modified SME will crash when clicking on the module for the custom tables. You can change the description, but &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; change the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The description is what shows on the custom tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12. In the  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Field Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column, enter the name as you want it to show on the custom tab. This name can be changed if needed later.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13.   Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Field Type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. (see the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;do not&amp;#039;&amp;#039; notes under Field Name above)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14.   Place the field on the custom tab using the following columns:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Left&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – number of pixels from the left side of the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Top&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Number of pixels from the top of the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Height&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Number of pixels high the cell is.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Width&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Number of pixels wide the cell is.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;15.  Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Examples.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WidthExamples.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preview what the fields will look like by clicking the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab in the Custom Table Designer window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Preview.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see the custom tab in the module, close and reopen SME. Go the module and select the Custom Tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rearrange Fields on Custom Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
Another way to rearrange the position of custom fields on custom tabs is to go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Views&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, select the custom tab. Drag the fields in the position you want them in and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save Layout&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in lower left corner. Once the layout is saved, you will see the Left and  Top column will be updated on the Design tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:RearrangeFieldsOnCustomTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Tab Order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you create more than one custom tab for a module, you can determine the order of the tabs. In the Custom Table Designer window, locate the Tab Order field. Enter 1 in the tab you want on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
In the example below, the VIP Info tab has 1 in tab order so it will be on the left. The Standard tab has 2 in the tab order so it will be on the right. If there was another tab, we would enter 3 to have it to the right of the standard tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomTabOrderExample.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Tab - Admin Access ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Custom Table Designer window, there is a checkbox for Admin Access. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:admiAccess.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is checked, then the tab is only visible to SME users assigned to user groups where User Is An &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Administrator&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked (image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UserGroup_IsAdmin.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit Custom Fields ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Tabs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the custom tab containing the fields you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Add more fields by clicking [[File:PlusSign.jpg]] at the bottom or make changes to existing fields.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab to preview your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Close and reopen SME. Go to the custom tab in the module to see your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Field Access Level ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can assign an access level to each custom field. Only users that are authorized to see that level can access the custom field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone with access 0 can see everything, access 1 would only see fields with access 1 or higher, user group access 2 would not see 0 and 1 fields and would see 2 and higher, etc. Access levels can go to 5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Assign SME user groups an access levels&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click User Groups.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to locate the user group you want to apply an access level to.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the Administrative Clearances tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Locate the User Field Access Level field in the right column.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Enter the access level (1-5)&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Assign an access level to the custom fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Custom Tabs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the tab containing the fields you need to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Access Level&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column (circled below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FieldAccessLevel.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Enter the access level for the custom field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Click Save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;*NOTE* Access levels are fixed, so you cannot allow a user group to see fields with access levels 1, 5, and 10 but no others.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Form Code ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Form code is entered in the customer and then on the work order.  (Image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomerFormCode.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tabs matching this form code and the tabs with no form code and will show on the work order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You assign the form code to the custom tab (circled in image below). Form codes can be numbers or text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AssignFormCode.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;For example you have a custom tab created for Home Depot customers and you assigned the Form Code of HD. You set the form code on the home depot billing company and every time you create an order for a customer with HD as billing, it sets that form code on the service order and only shows the custom tabs with the HD form code AND any custom tab with a blank form code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Table Editor Fields Locking Up ==&lt;br /&gt;
If the Custom Table window is locking you out of some of the fields such as the Description or Top columns, follow these steps to correct the issue:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Log out of SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Go to your \High5software\sme5.exe  folder (you can access by rightclicking on your shortcut and &amp;#039;Open file Location(Win7) - or Properties&amp;gt;Find Target (XP))&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Search on the file dlgcDesign.ini &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Delete the file anywhere it comes up. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Log into SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Then try editing again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Fields in TechPortal ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want the custom fields you create in Service Orders or Install Orders to show in TechPortal you need to check Show In TP.  Once checked, the tab the fields are on will show in TechPortal and all the fields with that checked will show on the tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomTabsInTP.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you create a custom tab in service orders called “Tech”, all the fields on that tab with “Show in TP” checked will show on the detail tab circled in image below. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TechCustomField.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Fields in Customer populate Service Order etc. ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the same custom field in a customer record and in a service order, then when you create a service order for the customer, the custom field will be populated by what is in the field in the customer record. The value in the customer custom field will be passed into the service order custom field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When setting up the custom field, in order for the data in the field to pass to the service order the fields have to have the exact same Field Name, Field Type, Field Description, Field Length and if it is a pick list, it must have the same values in the pick list column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomTable_SameFieldName.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Then go to the customer record and fill out the custom field. Going forward, when you create a service order for the customer, the value in the customer custom field will pass to the service order custom fiel. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomFieldFollowtoOrder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Values can pass from one record to another in the following scenarios:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customer to Service Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customer to Install Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customer to Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lead to Customer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Proposal to Service Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Proposal to Install Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Service Order to Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Install Order to Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== As Details Checkbox ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AsDetails.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
When setting up a new custom tab you can check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;As Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the custom tab will display under &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, not Customer Tab tab. In each field on a Custom Details tab you can enter multiple entries.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomDetailsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tech Certificates ==&lt;br /&gt;
New feature as of 8.1.5.106&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you create additional fields for technician and subcontractor certifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TechCertCustom.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TechCertForm.jpg]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Custom_Tabs_and_Fields&amp;diff=6443</id>
		<title>Custom Tabs and Fields</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Custom_Tabs_and_Fields&amp;diff=6443"/>
		<updated>2020-02-28T17:47:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;In SME 7.1 you have the ability to add custom tabs with custom fields to your records. You can call these fields any name you want and choose between many field types. In the search window you can sort by the custom fields just like all the other fields in SME. You can also apply an access level to each of the fields to restrict user groups from seeing the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomTabsFields.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields can be created in Leads, Customer, Maintenance Contracts, Customer Equipment, Service, Install, Invoices, and Users. Once custom fields are created in those modules, a tab called &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom tabs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; will be created. On this tab, you can add multiple custom tabs containing custom fields as shown in the image above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View the video below for an overview or read through the guide for more information about setting up custom fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;embedvideo service=&amp;quot;youtube&amp;quot;&amp;gt;https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Del59utdPR8&amp;lt;/embedvideo&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;Del59utdPR8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Types of Custom Fields ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt; border-style: solid; border-color: windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 1.45in; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: solid solid solid none; border-color: windowtext windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 220.5pt; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Definition&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: solid solid solid none; border-color: windowtext windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 207.9pt; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Sample&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Boolean&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;True or false field. Check the box for true. Leave the box unchecked for false.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Boolean.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Button&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This requires custom code to respond to the button.   For example you can add code that runs some other program when the button is pressed.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Button.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Currency&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Uses the default currency set by Windows language and settings, for example $.   Type numbers in the field or click in the field to use the calculator.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Currency.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Date&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Click in the field and select a date from the calendar.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:date.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DateTime&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter both date and time. Select a date from the calendar. Use   to increase or decrease time.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:DateTime.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Integer&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter numbers only.  Cannot enter a decimal. Limit to 9 digits&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Integer.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;LargeInt&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter numbers only.  Cannot enter a decimal.  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:LargeInt.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Memo&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Used for a paragraph or large block of text versus one line of text.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Numeric(decimal)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter a number with decimals. (the field length needs to be &amp;gt; 5)&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:NumericDecimal.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;PickList&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drop down list.   The drop down list can be configured with an unlimited number of selections.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter the drop down list by clicking in the PickList column. [[Image:EditPickList.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Picklist.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;String&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Used for a single line of text.  For a block or paragraph of text, use Memo.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:string.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Time&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Time field&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Time.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create Custom Fields ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.Go to Utilities module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
The Custom Table Designer window will open. This is where you will select what module you are adding the tab and fields to. You will assign a name for the tab and layout the custom fields on the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field, select the module you want to add a new custom tab to.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tab Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field, enter a name for the custom tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
Now the tab is created, you can start adding the fields to the new tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.       Click [[File:PlusSign.jpg]] at the bottom of the Custom Table Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddNewField.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10.   Notice a line was added to the Design tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:NewFieldRow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11.   In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Field Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; enter the name of the field. This is the database name and has the following requirements: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--- &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; enter any special characters &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Such as: !,@,#,$,%,^,1,2,3&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in these fields, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;only letters a-z &amp;amp; A-Z&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--- &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; have any spaces between words in the Field Name column. The Field Description is the name that shows on the custom tab and the field description can have spaces.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;---&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; change the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; once you have started to enter data into the field in the module. If you make changes to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; the link to the original table field and/or data will be broken. (You can restore by reverting the type and/or name to the original state). If you change the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; you will encounter issues since the table will contain field values of a type different than that selected or the field name will not match that in the underlying table. If the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; are modified SME will crash when clicking on the module for the custom tables. You can change the description, but &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; change the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The description is what shows on the custom tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12. In the  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Field Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column, enter the name as you want it to show on the custom tab. This name can be changed if needed later.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13.   Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Field Type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. (see the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;do not&amp;#039;&amp;#039; notes under Field Name above)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14.   Place the field on the custom tab using the following columns:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Left&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – number of pixels from the left side of the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Top&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Number of pixels from the top of the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Height&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Number of pixels high the cell is.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Width&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Number of pixels wide the cell is.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;15.  Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Examples.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WidthExamples.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preview what the fields will look like by clicking the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab in the Custom Table Designer window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Preview.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see the custom tab in the module, close and reopen SME. Go the module and select the Custom Tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rearrange Fields on Custom Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
Another way to rearrange the position of custom fields on custom tabs is to go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Views&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, select the custom tab. Drag the fields in the position you want them in and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save Layout&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in lower left corner. Once the layout is saved, you will see the Left and  Top column will be updated on the Design tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:RearrangeFieldsOnCustomTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Tab Order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you create more than one custom tab for a module, you can determine the order of the tabs. In the Custom Table Designer window, locate the Tab Order field. Enter 1 in the tab you want on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
In the example below, the VIP Info tab has 1 in tab order so it will be on the left. The Standard tab has 2 in the tab order so it will be on the right. If there was another tab, we would enter 3 to have it to the right of the standard tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomTabOrderExample.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Tab - Admin Access ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Custom Table Designer window, there is a checkbox for Admin Access. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:admiAccess.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is checked, then the tab is only visible to SME users assigned to user groups where User Is An &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Administrator&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked (image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UserGroup_IsAdmin.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit Custom Fields ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Tabs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the custom tab containing the fields you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Add more fields by clicking [[File:PlusSign.jpg]] at the bottom or make changes to existing fields.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab to preview your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Close and reopen SME. Go to the custom tab in the module to see your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Field Access Level ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can assign an access level to each custom field. Only users that are authorized to see that level can access the custom field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone with access 0 can see everything, access 1 would only see fields with access 1 or higher, user group access 2 would not see 0 and 1 fields and would see 2 and higher, etc. Access levels can go to 5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Assign SME user groups an access levels&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click User Groups.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to locate the user group you want to apply an access level to.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the Administrative Clearances tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Locate the User Field Access Level field in the right column.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Enter the access level (1-5)&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Assign an access level to the custom fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Custom Tabs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the tab containing the fields you need to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Access Level&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column (circled below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FieldAccessLevel.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Enter the access level for the custom field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Click Save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;*NOTE* Access levels are fixed, so you cannot allow a user group to see fields with access levels 1, 5, and 10 but no others.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Form Code ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Form code is entered in the customer and then on the work order.  (Image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomerFormCode.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tabs matching this form code and the tabs with no form code and will show on the work order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You assign the form code to the custom tab (circled in image below). Form codes can be numbers or text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AssignFormCode.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;For example you have a custom tab created for Home Depot customers and you assigned the Form Code of HD. You set the form code on the home depot billing company and every time you create an order for a customer with HD as billing, it sets that form code on the service order and only shows the custom tabs with the HD form code AND any custom tab with a blank form code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Table Editor Fields Locking Up ==&lt;br /&gt;
If the Custom Table window is locking you out of some of the fields such as the Description or Top columns, follow these steps to correct the issue:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Log out of SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Go to your \High5software\sme5.exe  folder (you can access by rightclicking on your shortcut and &amp;#039;Open file Location(Win7) - or Properties&amp;gt;Find Target (XP))&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Search on the file dlgcDesign.ini &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Delete the file anywhere it comes up. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Log into SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Then try editing again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Fields in TechPortal ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want the custom fields you create in Service Orders or Install Orders to show in TechPortal you need to check Show In TP.  Once checked, the tab the fields are on will show in TechPortal and all the fields with that checked will show on the tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomTabsInTP.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you create a custom tab in service orders called “Tech”, all the fields on that tab with “Show in TP” checked will show on the detail tab circled in image below. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TechCustomField.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Fields in Customer populate Service Order etc. ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the same custom field in a customer record and in a service order, then when you create a service order for the customer, the custom field will be populated by what is in the field in the customer record. The value in the customer custom field will be passed into the service order custom field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When setting up the custom field, in order for the data in the field to pass to the service order the fields have to have the exact same Field Name, Field Type, Field Description, Field Length and if it is a pick list, it must have the same values in the pick list column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomTable_SameFieldName.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Then go to the customer record and fill out the custom field. Going forward, when you create a service order for the customer, the value in the customer custom field will pass to the service order custom fiel. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomFieldFollowtoOrder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Values can pass from one record to another in the following scenarios:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customer to Service Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customer to Install Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customer to Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lead to Customer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Proposal to Service Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Proposal to Install Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Service Order to Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Install Order to Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== As Details Checkbox ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AsDetails.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
When setting up a new custom tab you can check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;As Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the custom tab will display under &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, not Customer Tab tab. In each field on a Custom Details tab you can enter multiple entries.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomDetailsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tech Certificates ==&lt;br /&gt;
New feature as of 8.1.5.106&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you create additional fields for technician and subcontractor certifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TechCertCustom.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TechCertForm.jpg]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Custom_Tabs_and_Fields&amp;diff=6442</id>
		<title>Custom Tabs and Fields</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Custom_Tabs_and_Fields&amp;diff=6442"/>
		<updated>2020-02-28T17:47:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;In SME 7.1 you have the ability to add custom tabs with custom fields to your records. You can call these fields any name you want and choose between many field types. In the search window you can sort by the custom fields just like all the other fields in SME. You can also apply an access level to each of the fields to restrict user groups from seeing the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomTabsFields.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields can be created in Leads, Customer, Maintenance Contracts, Customer Equipment, Service, Install, Invoices, and Users. Once custom fields are created in those modules, a tab called &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom tabs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; will be created. On this tab, you can add multiple custom tabs containing custom fields as shown in the image above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View the video below for an overview or read through the guide for more information about setting up custom fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube&amp;gt;https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Del59utdPR8&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;Del59utdPR8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Types of Custom Fields ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt; border-style: solid; border-color: windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 1.45in; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: solid solid solid none; border-color: windowtext windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 220.5pt; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Definition&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: solid solid solid none; border-color: windowtext windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 207.9pt; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Sample&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Boolean&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;True or false field. Check the box for true. Leave the box unchecked for false.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Boolean.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Button&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This requires custom code to respond to the button.   For example you can add code that runs some other program when the button is pressed.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Button.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Currency&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Uses the default currency set by Windows language and settings, for example $.   Type numbers in the field or click in the field to use the calculator.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Currency.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Date&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Click in the field and select a date from the calendar.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:date.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DateTime&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter both date and time. Select a date from the calendar. Use   to increase or decrease time.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:DateTime.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Integer&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter numbers only.  Cannot enter a decimal. Limit to 9 digits&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Integer.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;LargeInt&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter numbers only.  Cannot enter a decimal.  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:LargeInt.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Memo&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Used for a paragraph or large block of text versus one line of text.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Numeric(decimal)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter a number with decimals. (the field length needs to be &amp;gt; 5)&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:NumericDecimal.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;PickList&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drop down list.   The drop down list can be configured with an unlimited number of selections.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Enter the drop down list by clicking in the PickList column. [[Image:EditPickList.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:Picklist.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;String&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Used for a single line of text.  For a block or paragraph of text, use Memo.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  [[Image:string.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 1.45in&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;139&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Time&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 220.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;294&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Time field&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 207.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;277&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Time.jpg]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create Custom Fields ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.Go to Utilities module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
The Custom Table Designer window will open. This is where you will select what module you are adding the tab and fields to. You will assign a name for the tab and layout the custom fields on the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field, select the module you want to add a new custom tab to.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tab Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field, enter a name for the custom tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
Now the tab is created, you can start adding the fields to the new tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.       Click [[File:PlusSign.jpg]] at the bottom of the Custom Table Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddNewField.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10.   Notice a line was added to the Design tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:NewFieldRow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11.   In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Field Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; enter the name of the field. This is the database name and has the following requirements: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--- &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; enter any special characters &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Such as: !,@,#,$,%,^,1,2,3&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in these fields, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;only letters a-z &amp;amp; A-Z&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--- &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; have any spaces between words in the Field Name column. The Field Description is the name that shows on the custom tab and the field description can have spaces.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;---&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; change the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; once you have started to enter data into the field in the module. If you make changes to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; the link to the original table field and/or data will be broken. (You can restore by reverting the type and/or name to the original state). If you change the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; you will encounter issues since the table will contain field values of a type different than that selected or the field name will not match that in the underlying table. If the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; are modified SME will crash when clicking on the module for the custom tables. You can change the description, but &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DO NOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; change the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;field type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The description is what shows on the custom tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12. In the  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Field Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column, enter the name as you want it to show on the custom tab. This name can be changed if needed later.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13.   Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Field Type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. (see the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;do not&amp;#039;&amp;#039; notes under Field Name above)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14.   Place the field on the custom tab using the following columns:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Left&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – number of pixels from the left side of the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Top&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Number of pixels from the top of the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Height&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Number of pixels high the cell is.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Width&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Number of pixels wide the cell is.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;15.  Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Examples.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WidthExamples.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preview what the fields will look like by clicking the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab in the Custom Table Designer window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Preview.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see the custom tab in the module, close and reopen SME. Go the module and select the Custom Tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rearrange Fields on Custom Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
Another way to rearrange the position of custom fields on custom tabs is to go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Views&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, select the custom tab. Drag the fields in the position you want them in and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save Layout&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in lower left corner. Once the layout is saved, you will see the Left and  Top column will be updated on the Design tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:RearrangeFieldsOnCustomTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Tab Order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you create more than one custom tab for a module, you can determine the order of the tabs. In the Custom Table Designer window, locate the Tab Order field. Enter 1 in the tab you want on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
In the example below, the VIP Info tab has 1 in tab order so it will be on the left. The Standard tab has 2 in the tab order so it will be on the right. If there was another tab, we would enter 3 to have it to the right of the standard tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomTabOrderExample.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Tab - Admin Access ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Custom Table Designer window, there is a checkbox for Admin Access. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:admiAccess.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is checked, then the tab is only visible to SME users assigned to user groups where User Is An &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Administrator&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked (image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UserGroup_IsAdmin.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit Custom Fields ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Tabs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the custom tab containing the fields you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Add more fields by clicking [[File:PlusSign.jpg]] at the bottom or make changes to existing fields.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab to preview your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Close and reopen SME. Go to the custom tab in the module to see your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Field Access Level ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can assign an access level to each custom field. Only users that are authorized to see that level can access the custom field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone with access 0 can see everything, access 1 would only see fields with access 1 or higher, user group access 2 would not see 0 and 1 fields and would see 2 and higher, etc. Access levels can go to 5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Assign SME user groups an access levels&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click User Groups.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to locate the user group you want to apply an access level to.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the Administrative Clearances tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Locate the User Field Access Level field in the right column.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Enter the access level (1-5)&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Assign an access level to the custom fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Custom Tabs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the tab containing the fields you need to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Access Level&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column (circled below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FieldAccessLevel.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Enter the access level for the custom field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Click Save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;*NOTE* Access levels are fixed, so you cannot allow a user group to see fields with access levels 1, 5, and 10 but no others.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Form Code ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Form code is entered in the customer and then on the work order.  (Image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomerFormCode.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tabs matching this form code and the tabs with no form code and will show on the work order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You assign the form code to the custom tab (circled in image below). Form codes can be numbers or text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AssignFormCode.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;For example you have a custom tab created for Home Depot customers and you assigned the Form Code of HD. You set the form code on the home depot billing company and every time you create an order for a customer with HD as billing, it sets that form code on the service order and only shows the custom tabs with the HD form code AND any custom tab with a blank form code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Table Editor Fields Locking Up ==&lt;br /&gt;
If the Custom Table window is locking you out of some of the fields such as the Description or Top columns, follow these steps to correct the issue:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Log out of SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Go to your \High5software\sme5.exe  folder (you can access by rightclicking on your shortcut and &amp;#039;Open file Location(Win7) - or Properties&amp;gt;Find Target (XP))&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Search on the file dlgcDesign.ini &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Delete the file anywhere it comes up. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Log into SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-           Then try editing again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Fields in TechPortal ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want the custom fields you create in Service Orders or Install Orders to show in TechPortal you need to check Show In TP.  Once checked, the tab the fields are on will show in TechPortal and all the fields with that checked will show on the tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomTabsInTP.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you create a custom tab in service orders called “Tech”, all the fields on that tab with “Show in TP” checked will show on the detail tab circled in image below. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TechCustomField.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Fields in Customer populate Service Order etc. ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the same custom field in a customer record and in a service order, then when you create a service order for the customer, the custom field will be populated by what is in the field in the customer record. The value in the customer custom field will be passed into the service order custom field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When setting up the custom field, in order for the data in the field to pass to the service order the fields have to have the exact same Field Name, Field Type, Field Description, Field Length and if it is a pick list, it must have the same values in the pick list column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomTable_SameFieldName.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Then go to the customer record and fill out the custom field. Going forward, when you create a service order for the customer, the value in the customer custom field will pass to the service order custom fiel. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomFieldFollowtoOrder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Values can pass from one record to another in the following scenarios:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customer to Service Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customer to Install Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customer to Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lead to Customer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Proposal to Service Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Proposal to Install Order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Service Order to Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Install Order to Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== As Details Checkbox ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AsDetails.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
When setting up a new custom tab you can check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;As Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the custom tab will display under &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, not Customer Tab tab. In each field on a Custom Details tab you can enter multiple entries.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomDetailsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tech Certificates ==&lt;br /&gt;
New feature as of 8.1.5.106&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you create additional fields for technician and subcontractor certifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TechCertCustom.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TechCertForm.jpg]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Warehouse_Manager_for_SME&amp;diff=6349</id>
		<title>Warehouse Manager for SME</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Warehouse_Manager_for_SME&amp;diff=6349"/>
		<updated>2018-10-09T18:51:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: /* Warehouse Manager for SME */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Notice:  Warehouse Manager for SME mentioned here has replaced &amp;quot;Barcode for SME&amp;quot; is changing to a browser based application along with a usb or bluetooth barcode device called &amp;quot;Warehouse Manager for SME&amp;quot;.  The old Barcode for SME using the MT2000 is discontinued as of October 2013.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Warehouse Manager for SME ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse Manager for SME utilizes a browser device along with any usb or bluetooth barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Website for the lastest version of this product is located at http://m.high5software.com/module/Home.html&lt;br /&gt;
  Previous version is located here:  http://m.high5software.com/barcode.html&lt;br /&gt;
You will need to establish an account and login through SME Master at http://m.high5software.com/SMEMaster, then select applications&lt;br /&gt;
Warehouse Manager for SME is compatible with SME7.2 or SME8 although we recommend SME8 for best performance.&lt;br /&gt;
===Barcode Device for Warehouse Manager for SME===&lt;br /&gt;
Warehouse Manager for SME will technically work with any usb or bluetooth connected barcode.  However, it&amp;#039;s not possible for High 5 Software to test every device so we recommend you select a barcode that is compatible with your browser device (smartphone, tablet, laptop, or PC).&lt;br /&gt;
High5 has tested with the following devices:&lt;br /&gt;
* Socket mobile: http://ww1.socketmobile.com/products/bluetooth-scanners/how-to-buy/details.aspx?sku=CX2864-1336&lt;br /&gt;
* Motorola: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/US-EN/Product+Lines/Symbol/Symbol+Bar+Code+Scanners/Motorola+CS3000+Series_US-EN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Although some consumer applications are able to use a smartphone camera as a barcode device, we believe that the camera is not fast enough for industrial applications.  Therefore, you need a separate barcode dedicated barcode device for scanning.  These devices are tuned for speed and use fast laser or image scanning.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: RFID devices should also work, however have not yet been tested.&lt;br /&gt;
If you acquire a barcode or RFID device that is able to connect to your browser device (smartphone) but is not working properly with Warehouse Manager for SME, please contact support@h5sw.com and we will investigate.&lt;br /&gt;
===Browser Device for Barcode===&lt;br /&gt;
Warehouse Manager for SME will work with any modern browser except that we do NOT support IE-Internet Explorer because Microsoft does not follow standard internet protocols and constantly changes the browser making it not work properly.  Instead we recommend Chrome, Firefox or Safari on IOS devices.&lt;br /&gt;
This means that the Warehouse Manager will work on a SmartPhone, Tablet, Laptop or PC.  It&amp;#039;s VERY flexible.&lt;br /&gt;
The browser device is used as the screen and the connected barcode device is used for the scanning of the barcodes or RFIDs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Licensing and Pricing==&lt;br /&gt;
Pricing of Warehouse Manager for SME is $40 per named user per month or $995 plus $199 per year support.&lt;br /&gt;
This does not include the barcode nor the browser device as you would acquire that separately based on your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
Contact sales@high5software.com to activate your licenses.&lt;br /&gt;
==Functions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Receive PO&amp;#039;s===&lt;br /&gt;
To receive purchase orders click the drop down menu at the top of the bar code application and click &amp;quot;Receive Mode&amp;quot;. Now you&amp;#039;re ready to scan in items that were purchased and shipped to the warehouse to replenish your inventory. The workflow, starting from generating a purchase order, might look something like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Create A Purchase Order====&lt;br /&gt;
Note: For a comprehensive guide to purchase orders in SME please see [[Purchase Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You noticed you&amp;#039;re running low on some items so you go into SME to create a purchase order to replenish your stock and buy some new items from your supplier. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Purchase Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in Inventory Module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The vendor information will populate the Vendor tab on Details and Settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Fill out the rest of the fields on Details and Settings tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PO_DetailsAndSettings.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  PO #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This number will be auto-populated by SME.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reference #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - this field will be populated with the PO#. You can edit this field as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Date you created the PO&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Due Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select the date the parts are due in. You can sort by this field in the search window to manage your purchase orders.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Click Customer to add the customer name to the PO. You can sort by this field in the search window.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Taken By&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – The SME user that created the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Requested By&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – You can select the SME user that requested the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Approved By&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select the SME user that approved the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
*   &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; PO Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – You can customize this field to reflect the milestones each PO goes through (e.g. ready for approval, approved, sent to vendor, received). You can sort by this field in the search window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Items from Service, Add Items from Install or Add Items from Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. The Search window will open with all Service, Install or Invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Double click on an order and the materials on the order will display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ViewItemsOnOrder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Double click on the material you want to add to the purchase order.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8. Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PO Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. Notice the material selected listed here.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9. Repeat steps 4-7 to add additional materials on order to the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Shipping Notes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to add shipping notes to the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Find the PO in the Bar Code Application====&lt;br /&gt;
The next step is to find the PO that was just created in SME in the bar code application. Let&amp;#039;s say we purchased a &amp;quot;Telecare Package&amp;quot; consisting of a few different items for one of our technicians and had the items shipped to &amp;quot;Bob&amp;#039;s Van&amp;quot;. Bob needs to use the bar code application to scan these items into the system and verify that he has received them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Start at the home page for the bar code application http://m.high5software.com/Tech/Barcode.html&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose &amp;quot;Receive Mode&amp;quot; from the drop down menu at the top of the page&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the location where the PO items are being shipped to.&lt;br /&gt;
#A list of all of the purchase orders for that location will be shown. Select the PO you want to receive. There it is! PO number 104 from our favorite vendor, Dave&amp;#039;s Dainty Dress Shop. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Receive Mode PO List.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Receive PO====&lt;br /&gt;
Now let&amp;#039;s scan the items associated with the purchase order into SME&amp;#039;s inventory system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click on your PO to view the items that were shipped to that location&lt;br /&gt;
*Each item on the list will display the quantity remaining to be scanned (e.g. 0 of 1.0000 means that you&amp;#039;ve already scanned the single item of that type that was included in the PO. 1.0000 of 3.0000 means there is one item that still needs to be scanned, out of the three items of that type that were shipped)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Receive Mode Item List.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Scan the bar code of the item you want to identify as received (or type the Item Number into the text field and press Enter)&lt;br /&gt;
*If the item is not a serial part then it will immediately be received&lt;br /&gt;
*If the item IS a serial part you will type the item number, press enter, then type a unique serial number and press enter again&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Continue scanning until all of the items are received and the quantities remaining are all zero&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Confirm PO Actions in SME====&lt;br /&gt;
Now go back to SME into the Inventory module, to the Purchase Order category. Find the purchase order you just received and confirm that it is marked as received. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SME Receive Mode Confirmation.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pick Parts for Orders===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Pick Mode&amp;quot; in the Warehouse Manager bar code application allows the user to pick and reserve parts for specific customer orders, and then move those selected parts to another location if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select Pick Mode in the top drop down&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the warehouse location where you want to Pick From and Pick To.  &lt;br /&gt;
## If you are just reserving parts for an order, select the current or main warehouse where the parts are and the picking will reserve those parts for the order selected.&lt;br /&gt;
## If you want to reserve AND move, select the warehouse you want to move to for example to a tech warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the order you are picking for.  You can use barcode to select the order if you have a barcode for the order number&lt;br /&gt;
# Barcode the part or serial number.&lt;br /&gt;
## The application will look for barcode in the part number, manufacturing part number, or any of the vendor part numbers for associated vendor parts for a specific part (alternate parts in SME&amp;gt;Inventory&amp;gt;Vendors tab).&lt;br /&gt;
## If the part is serialized, barcode the serial number next.&lt;br /&gt;
## If the part is not serialized it will pick the part for this order.&lt;br /&gt;
# Pick Messages:&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;quot;No Stock Available&amp;quot;  If SME does not have any stock, you will get &amp;quot;No Stock Available&amp;quot; and will need to resolve the stock quantities in SME for example maybe the part has not been received or was already selected for another order.&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;quot;Fully Picked&amp;quot;  If all the parts are already picked for that part a message will show &amp;quot;Fully Picked&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;quot;Did not receive&amp;quot;  Error code -8.  Was unable to select the part for various reasons.  Check in SME to determine why that part is not selectable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Transfer Parts between Warehouses===&lt;br /&gt;
Transfer mode is intended to be used when moving inventory between warehouses. For example, Bob the technician notices that he is running low on the stock of routers that he keeps in his van and gets some more. To keep track of where the company&amp;#039;s assets are Bob would scan those items using Transfer Mode when he takes them from the warehouse and puts them in his van. Let&amp;#039;s go through the steps he would follow: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Transfer Mode&amp;quot; at the top of the bar code application&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the location that you are transferring inventory FROM in the large &amp;quot;Location&amp;quot; drop down menu&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose the location that you are transferring inventory TO in the smaller &amp;quot;To&amp;quot; drop down menu&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the quantity of a specific type of item you&amp;#039;d like to transfer&lt;br /&gt;
# Scan the bar code (or type in the Item Number and press Enter)&lt;br /&gt;
# A confirmation message is displayed and you can verify that those items were transferred to the new location&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== OLD Barcode for SME ==&lt;br /&gt;
THIS PRODUCT IS DISCONTINUED AS OF OCTOBER 2013!&lt;br /&gt;
Old Barcode for SME is using the Motorola MT2000 with built-in software. This product is being discontinued as of October 2013 and will no longer be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Device Recommendations ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Motorola/Symbol MT2000 series is the only device that works with Barcode for SME.  You will need the WiFi capability rather than just BlueTooth for greater range throughout the warehouse, so we recommend the MT2090 version.  Most barcodes are 1D so you could go with the SR Laser which only supports 1D barcodes, however the trend is towards 2D barcodes and to future-proof your device, we recommend a 2D imager rather than just the 1D laser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specific Device Recommendation for barcode with 2D imager and WiFi, these are kits that include the charger:&lt;br /&gt;
* For 2D standard image recognition (this will work for most applications)&lt;br /&gt;
** US: [http://www.barcodesinc.com/motorola/part-kt-2090-sl2000c1us.htm?aff-isv-HIG001 MT2090 SR Imager 2D US Kit]&lt;br /&gt;
** Worldwide: [http://www.barcodesinc.com/motorola/part-kt-2090-sd2000c1ww.htm?aff-isv-HIG001 MT2090 SR Imager 2D WW Kit]&lt;br /&gt;
* For High Density image recognition (this will give greatest flexibility for label scanning, usually slightly higher price):&lt;br /&gt;
** US: [http://www.barcodesinc.com/motorola/part-kt-2090-hd2000c1us.htm?aff-isv-HIG001 MT2090 HD Imager 2D US Kit]&lt;br /&gt;
**Worldwide: [http://www.barcodesinc.com/motorola/part-kt-2090-hd2000c1ww.htm?aff-isv-HIG001 MT2090 HD Imager 2D WW Kit]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Login ==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to use the device a user must login. These credentials will be used to access the SME database, and for settings in various other functions. A “live” connection does not need to be present in order to login. However the device requires login to operate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;User Login&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Upon each use of the SME Barcode the device will require the user to login. It will attempt to check the credentials through SME and return whether they were valid. If they are not valid, OR a disconnected state is desired select OK. Otherwise Select Retry to re-enter user credentials. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When the user is ready to close the application Selecting Close instead of log-out will allow the application to be ran again using the same user Login Credentials as previous. A Logout would allow a new user to login.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Initial Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two main portions to setup the device, both will be automatically presented upon initial use, and can be accessed later through the menu. First is obtaining the web service url for use on the device. The other is choosing the default location of the device. [Print Setup will be covered in a different section]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Obtaining the Web Service URL&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* The Web service Setup screen will be the first screen presented upon initial use. &lt;br /&gt;
* This requires a “Live” connection, but can be bypassed by pressing the Menu button and selecting Home. This will bypass login and run in a disconnected state.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the correct information and press Login. The URL will be obtained and stored within the device.&lt;br /&gt;
* Should the URL need to be changed for any reason, press the Menu button from the Login Screen and select Setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Choosing a Location for the device&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* The device location will be the second screen that appears upon initial use. &lt;br /&gt;
* This requires a Live Connection; if a live connection doesn’t exist this function is not available. However once it has been set it will remain in the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Receiving Purchase Order Items ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PO Receive is a “Live Only” feature, meaning there must be any active internet connection, allowing the device to update the SME database in “real-time”. PO Receive will allow the user to navigate through a listing of Open Purchase Orders selecting the desired PO by keypad or by scanning a barcode associated with the PO Number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Selecting a Purchase Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main menu, scroll using the direction pad until PO Receive is highlighted. Select using either ENT or the OK Button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A purchase order can be selected by one of the following ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scroll to the Order desired; press ENT or the right menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Type in the Order Number in the box; press ENT or the right menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scanning a barcode relating to the Order Number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Receiving Items on a Purchase Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Listed next are all the material items for the Order. Once an item is selected or scanned (same as above) a screen will appear based on whether the item is serialized or non-serialized&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For serialized items:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow serial numbers to be entered by keypad or scanning the S/N barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Multiple S/N can be scanned per item until need is met, the user presses the save button or scans another Order Item Barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* If an incorrect barcode is scanned into the S/N screen press the edit button and choose delete. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For non-serialized items:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow the user to enter the total quantity to be received or scan barcodes until all items have been entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once all items have been received the order will be closed unless it contains un-received service or package items. If so a message will display indicating this to be true and a count of each.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Adding New Manufacture/Vendor Part Numbers&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should a vendor change the barcode for an item, the device will allow adding a new barcode associated with the item. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you scan an item if the device does not recognize the item, it will prompt whether you would like to add the barcode to an item on the order. Pressing yes will bring up a list of items on the order. Simply choose the correct item and press ENT. The new association will be added to SME and receiving can continue as before.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reserving Items for a Customer Order  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reserve Items is a “Live Only” feature, meaning there must be any active internet connection, allowing the device to update the SME database in “real-time”. Reserve Items will allow the user to navigate through a listing of Open Customer Orders selecting the desired Customer Order by keypad or by scanning a barcode associated with the Order Number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Selecting a Customer Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From the main menu scroll up or down using the direction pad until &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reserve Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is highlighted selecting it using either the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; key or the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ok&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
Listed in ascending order are all the open Customer orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A Customer order can be selected by one of the following ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scroll to the Order desired; press ENT or the right menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Type in the Order Number in the box; press ENT or the right menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scanning a barcode relating to the Order Number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Reserving Items on an Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Listed next is all the material items for the Order&lt;br /&gt;
Once an item is selected or scanned (same as above) a screen will appear based on whether the item is serialized or non-serialized&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For serialized items:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow serial numbers to be entered by keypad or scanning the S/N barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Multiple S/N can be scanned per item until need is met, the user presses the save button or scans another Item Barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* If the item is reserved for another order a window will appear indicating this item cannot be used and another must be chosen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For non-serialized items:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow the user to enter the total quantity to be reserved or scan barcodes until the total needed or available has been reached&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Transferring a Customer Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once items for an order have been reserved, they can be transferred from one location to another. Note that only reserved items can be transferred and all items get transferred at once. The items will remain reserved but will be listed in the new location. Should you like to transfer available items please see Inventory Transfer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* From the order items screen press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MENU&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button, highlight &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transfer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and press &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Highlight the location you would like to transfer to and press &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Auditing Customer Equipment ==&lt;br /&gt;
Audit Customer Equipment is a function that will work regardless of connection status. However various features will be unavailable when there isn’t a “Live” connection. Audit Customer Equipment will allow equipment to be scanned and either a count (non-serialized) or serial number to be assigned. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;An Audit file is automatically stored under \Applications\SME Barcode\Equipment and can be retrieved by plugging the device into a Windows PC and navigating the folders on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. From the main menu scroll up or down using the direction pad until Audit Equipment is highlighted. Select it using either the ENT key or the OK Button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. A screen well appear with the default filename use to store the Audit information. Default file is: TechID_Date_’incremental counter’ e.g. 6443_05_01_2011_003 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Pressing Begin will advance you to the next screen allowing Audit to begin. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Pressing the ENT key will display a Save AS… screen allowing a custom file name to be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. The Location Screen appears allowing a new Location to be Entered, Scanned, or Chosen. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  * To find a location to choose press Find button&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  * Highlight the desired location and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  * Press NEXT to continue to the Audit Screen&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. The Audit screen appears to begin scanning barcodes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Once a barcode has been scanned a new screen will appear allowing a quantity to be entered or a serial number to be assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8. The screen will Display the location at the top with a listing of Item Scanned and either the qty or the S/N associated.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9. Pressing NEXT will allow a new Location to be selected. NOTE: Only items after a location change will reflect the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Non-Serialized:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Enter a quantity using the keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Continue scanning equipment with the same barcode or the same barcode until the desired count is met. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Press Save button to add this information to the audit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: DO NOT SCAN A DIFFERENT BARCODE- this will enter that barcode as the associated S/N for that item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Serialized:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scan a S/N&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This will return the application back to the Main Audit screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Should an incorrect item and/or S/N be scanned, the item can be deleted by pressing the ENT key and then OK to confirm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Sending, Printing, Saving&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Send to SME and Print are “Live Connection” only functions. They will not work if there is not a live connection. However the audit file will be saved regardless of the connection status. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Save is an Automatic function that happens whether you select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Back&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Menu-Close&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.Menu-Save can also be selected which will save the audit and remain on this screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Print will print the audit to any printer connected to the network the web service is on. To print press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Menu&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button, navigate to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Print&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; key&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This function requires setup. Please see the Setting up a Printer section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Send&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Send will insert the audit information into SME for later processing. To send the audit to SME, press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Menu&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button, navigate to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Send,&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inventory Material Stock ==&lt;br /&gt;
Inventory Stock is a function that will work regardless of connection status. However various features will be unavailable when there isn’t a “Live” connection. Inventory Stock will allow material items to be scanned and either a count (non-serialized) or serial number to be assigned. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;An inventory file is automatically stored under \Applications\SME Barcode\Inventory and can be retrieved by plugging the device into a Windows PC and navigating the folders on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Inventory Material Stock&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#From the main menu scroll up or down using the direction pad until Inventory Stock is highlighted. Select it using either the ENT key or the OK Button.&lt;br /&gt;
#A screen well appear with the default filename use to store the Inventory information. Default file is: TechID_Date_’incremental counter’ e.g. 6443_05_01_2011_003 &lt;br /&gt;
#Pressing Begin will advance you to the next screen allowing Inventory to begin. &lt;br /&gt;
#Pressing the ENT key will display a Save AS… screen allowing a custom file name to be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The Inventory screen appears to begin scanning barcodes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once a barcode has been scanned a new screen will appear allowing a quantity to be entered or a serial number to be assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The screen will display the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;shelf&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;bin&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, at the top along with a listing of item scanned and either the qty or the S/N associated.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Pressing NEXT will allow a new Location/shelf/bin to be selected. NOTE: Only items after a this change will reflect the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Non-Serialized:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Enter a quantity using the keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Continue scanning items with the same barcode or the same barcode until the desired count is met. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Press Save button to add this information to the Inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; DO NOT SCAN A DIFFERENT BARCODE- this will enter that barcode as the associated S/N for that item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Serialized:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Scan a S/N&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*This will return the application back to the Main Inventory screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Should an incorrect item and/or S/N be scanned, the item can be deleted by pressing the ENT key and then OK to confirm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Sending, Printing, Saving&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send to SME, and Print, are “Live Connection” only functions. They will not work if there is not a live connection. However the audit file will be saved regardless of the connection status. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Save is an Automatic function that happens whether you select Menu-Done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Print will print the audit to any printer connected to the network the web service is on. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To print press the Menu button, navigate to Print and press the ENT key&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This function requires setup. Please see the Setting up a Printer section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Send&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Send will insert the audit information into SME for later processing. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To send the audit to SME, press the menu button, navigate to Send, and press the ENT key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inventory Transfer ==&lt;br /&gt;
Transfer Inventory is a “Live Only” feature, meaning there must be any active internet connection, allowing the device to update the SME database in “real-time”. Transfer Inventory will allow the user to select from a listing of open transfer orders or create a new one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Initializing a transfer&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From the main transfer screen a new transfer order can be created or an existing open transfer order can be enacted.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For a new Transfer Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*The device automatically Selects From as the location the device is in&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Highlight To and press ENT, highlight the desired location and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Select whether to Deplete stock or not &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Press Begin&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For an existing Transfer order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Highlight Transfer Order # and press ENT, highlight the order desired and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Press Begin&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Adding Items&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scan any item to add it to the transfer; however only available items at the correct location can be added to a transfer order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once an item has been scanned one of the following will happen based on inventory type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For serialized&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow serial numbers to be entered by keypad or scanning the S/N barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Multiple S/N can be scanned per item until need is met, the user presses the save button or scans another Order Item Barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* If an incorrect barcode is scanned into the S/N screen press the edit button and choose delete. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For non-Serialized&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow the user to enter the total quantity to be received or scan barcodes until all items have been entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Switching Views&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function is really only applicable for transfers which began in SME. This allows you to view the items that have been placed on a transfer but don’t have items selected yet. Requested quantities will deplete as items are scanned for transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Press MENU highlight Switch View and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Closing a Transfer&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once all items desired have been added to a transfer order the order can be closed&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Press MENU highlight Close Transfer and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Print Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
Print is a function that will allow the user to print certain things from the Hand-held terminal. However setup must be performed prior to use from a Windows PC with the device connected and active Sync installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to setup print, several pre-conditions must be met first:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*A printer must be connected to the same network as the web service&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*The web service server must have the printer installed (Drivers etc)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*The user of the device must have an account on the server with which to print from, &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*A “print” account should be set-up on the server granting restricted print access. (Recommended)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once the pre-conditions have been met, Follow the following steps as directed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Connect the device to a Windows PC with Active sync installed&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Open the device through Windows Explorer and navigate to ‘\Applications\SME Barcode’&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Copy the file Settings.XML to your desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Right-Click the file on your desktop and select Edit&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Edit the following lines:&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;PrinterPath&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;Domain&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The form should look something like this:   &lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;PrinterPath&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;\\BUFFETT\HP Photosmart D5100 series&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;Domain&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;HIGH5SOFTWARE&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Save the file&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Move the File back to the device ‘\Applications\SME Barcode’ selecting Move Replace.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Mobile_Sales_for_SME&amp;diff=6337</id>
		<title>Mobile Sales for SME</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Mobile_Sales_for_SME&amp;diff=6337"/>
		<updated>2018-01-23T19:06:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: Marks moved page Mobile Sales for SME to SME Online: Name change from Mobile Sales to SME Online as a more general solution beyond sales.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[SME Online]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Online&amp;diff=6336</id>
		<title>SME Online</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Online&amp;diff=6336"/>
		<updated>2018-01-23T19:06:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: Marks moved page Mobile Sales for SME to SME Online: Name change from Mobile Sales to SME Online as a more general solution beyond sales.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Your laptops, smartphones, and tablets just got more powerful — so did your salespeople!&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Announcing Mobile Sales for SME for Preview Release&lt;br /&gt;
Building on success of [[Customer Cloud for SME]] and [[Mobile Tech for SME]], now we’ve added Mobile Sales for SME. This is all a part of our continuing mission to empower you to “Run a Better Service Business.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To try a demo follow these simple steps:&lt;br /&gt;
* Open browser on any device and go to https://cloud.h5sw.com/2.0&lt;br /&gt;
* Select &amp;quot;Try a Demo&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Mobile Sales for SME:&lt;br /&gt;
* If showing the home page, select Modules&amp;gt;Sales&lt;br /&gt;
* Select various modules on the left to go to customers, Leads, Proposals, Service Orders, Install Orders, Invoices, or Contacts.  On a mobile device this is an icon second from the top left.&lt;br /&gt;
* Search for the record you want using the powerful search capability.&lt;br /&gt;
* Filter records with the powerful filtering tool by selecting the filter icon in the search window&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a record or select the square icon in the top right&lt;br /&gt;
* To go back to the list, select the list icon.&lt;br /&gt;
* Actions can be found in the top actions icon to do any action from anywhere.&lt;br /&gt;
* Actions for a specific record can be found in the action icon at the top of the record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please send all feedback and suggestions to sales@h5sw.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mobile Sales for SME is a cloud-based solution that works for salespeople across the entire sales cycle, from initial prospecting to creating proposals, work orders, invoices, and contacts. Salespeople access Mobile Sales for SME wherever they are and from any web-accessible device. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Mobile Sales for SME - Empowering Salespeople&lt;br /&gt;
* Integrated with SME&lt;br /&gt;
** Salespeople can track customer information and interactions from initial prospect to closed customer&lt;br /&gt;
** Salespeople can make more insightful decisions to heighten service levels and close more deals&lt;br /&gt;
** Salespeople can manage Work Orders for both Service and Install Orders&lt;br /&gt;
** Salespeople can invoice customers to accelerate cash flow and commissions&lt;br /&gt;
* Subcontractor Feature&lt;br /&gt;
** View service order locations and those subcontractors located nearby&lt;br /&gt;
* Fully responsive web-based application&lt;br /&gt;
** Salespeople securely access the application on any web-accessible device and anywhere they have an internet connection&lt;br /&gt;
** Salespeople can use whatever screen they choose or even move between screens -  mobile smartphones, tablets, and laptop PCs &lt;br /&gt;
If you have salespeople working remotely empowering them with Mobile Sales for SME. At $30/user/month it is an affordable path to improving sale performance and your customers&amp;#039; experience with your business.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:EmailTemplateEmail.png&amp;diff=6311</id>
		<title>File:EmailTemplateEmail.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:EmailTemplateEmail.png&amp;diff=6311"/>
		<updated>2017-11-02T19:21:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:EmailTemplate.png&amp;diff=6310</id>
		<title>File:EmailTemplate.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:EmailTemplate.png&amp;diff=6310"/>
		<updated>2017-11-02T19:21:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Email_Template&amp;diff=6309</id>
		<title>Email Template</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Email_Template&amp;diff=6309"/>
		<updated>2017-11-02T19:20:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Email template bodies allow you to create preformed and dynamic text from anything in the database record.  These can be used to create a consistent email with minimal typing while still being personal for each customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create Email Template ==&lt;br /&gt;
To create an email templates follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open SME and go to Utilities&amp;gt;Custom&amp;gt;Custom Email Bodies and select Run It.  (Note if you do not have access to the utilities module, ask your administrator to provide access).&lt;br /&gt;
# Select Add at bottom left to create a new email template&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the module for this email template and give a Name&lt;br /&gt;
# Select options: &lt;br /&gt;
## Use on Module Emails:  To use on the module, you most likely want to check this&lt;br /&gt;
## Use in Batch Emails:  To use with the automatic batch emailing&lt;br /&gt;
## Use in Print Packet Emails:  To use with module&amp;gt;Actions&amp;gt;Print Packet&lt;br /&gt;
## Default in Modules:  To make this email template as the default.   Be sure to select only one default per module.&lt;br /&gt;
## Default on Batch Emails:  To make this the default email template for batch emails.  Be sure to select only one default per module.&lt;br /&gt;
## Default on Print Packets:  To make this the default email template for print packets.    Be sure to select only one default per module.&lt;br /&gt;
# Type in the standard text you want to show in your email.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag and Drop dynamic data into the email template&lt;br /&gt;
## Select the type of Dynamic Data to Pull data from the Record:&lt;br /&gt;
### Select the type of data you want: Standard, Custom, System, Login, or Company&lt;br /&gt;
### Standard:  Data from the module selected&lt;br /&gt;
### Custom:  Data from custom fields from the module selected&lt;br /&gt;
### System:  System data such as current date and time&lt;br /&gt;
### Login:  Information from the logged in user such as Name, email address, phone and so on.  Great for creating company wide consistent signatures.&lt;br /&gt;
### Company:  Data from company settings such as company name, address and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Post&amp;quot; to save your template.&lt;br /&gt;
# Example:  The following example is one we use at High 5 Software to send out support renewal invoices.  Dynamic data is described below:&lt;br /&gt;
## %BillContact% is the billing contact name&lt;br /&gt;
## %Balance% is the balance remaining on the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
## %Login.Name% is the name of the login user so this template can be used by anyone who has access to the module.&lt;br /&gt;
## %Login.EmailAdd% is the email of the logged in user.&lt;br /&gt;
## We could also have used %Company.AddressBlock% instead of typing out our company address so we don&amp;#039;t have to update the template if our address changes, but we decided to type it in manually.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmailTemplate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Use Email Template ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once your email template is setup, it&amp;#039;s easy to use as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the module you created your template for.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the Email Template (be sure to do this BEFORE you select the email report)&lt;br /&gt;
# Select Print/Email and select the report you want to email.&lt;br /&gt;
# The email body is automatically filled out with all the info you need!&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmailTemplateEmail.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modify Email Template ==&lt;br /&gt;
# To modify an email template, just go back to Utilities&amp;gt;Custom&amp;gt;Custom Email Bodies and select Run It.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the email template you want to modify&lt;br /&gt;
# Make changes and select Post when completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Email_Template&amp;diff=6308</id>
		<title>Email Template</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Email_Template&amp;diff=6308"/>
		<updated>2017-11-02T19:20:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Email template bodies allow you to create preformed and dynamic text from anything in the database record.  These can be used to create a consistent email with minimal typing while still being personal for each customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create Email Template ==&lt;br /&gt;
To create an email templates follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open SME and go to Utilities&amp;gt;Custom&amp;gt;Custom Email Bodies and select Run It.  (Note if you do not have access to the utilities module, ask your administrator to provide access).&lt;br /&gt;
# Select Add at bottom left to create a new email template&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the module for this email template and give a Name&lt;br /&gt;
# Select options: &lt;br /&gt;
## Use on Module Emails:  To use on the module, you most likely want to check this&lt;br /&gt;
## Use in Batch Emails:  To use with the automatic batch emailing&lt;br /&gt;
## Use in Print Packet Emails:  To use with module&amp;gt;Actions&amp;gt;Print Packet&lt;br /&gt;
## Default in Modules:  To make this email template as the default.   Be sure to select only one default per module.&lt;br /&gt;
## Default on Batch Emails:  To make this the default email template for batch emails.  Be sure to select only one default per module.&lt;br /&gt;
## Default on Print Packets:  To make this the default email template for print packets.    Be sure to select only one default per module.&lt;br /&gt;
# Type in the standard text you want to show in your email.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag and Drop dynamic data into the email template&lt;br /&gt;
## Select the type of Dynamic Data to Pull data from the Record:&lt;br /&gt;
### Select the type of data you want: Standard, Custom, System, Login, or Company&lt;br /&gt;
### Standard:  Data from the module selected&lt;br /&gt;
### Custom:  Data from custom fields from the module selected&lt;br /&gt;
### System:  System data such as current date and time&lt;br /&gt;
### Login:  Information from the logged in user such as Name, email address, phone and so on.  Great for creating company wide consistent signatures.&lt;br /&gt;
### Company:  Data from company settings such as company name, address and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Post&amp;quot; to save your template.&lt;br /&gt;
# Example:  The following example is one we use at High 5 Software to send out support renewal invoices.  Dynamic data is described below:&lt;br /&gt;
## %BillContact% is the billing contact name&lt;br /&gt;
## %Balance% is the balance remaining on the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
## %Login.Name% is the name of the login user so this template can be used by anyone who has access to the module.&lt;br /&gt;
## %Login.EmailAdd% is the email of the logged in user.&lt;br /&gt;
## We could also have used %Company.AddressBlock% instead of typing out our company address so we don&amp;#039;t have to update the template if our address changes, but we decided to type it in manually.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmailTemplate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Use Email Template ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once your email template is setup, it&amp;#039;s easy to use as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the module you created your template for.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the Email Template (be sure to do this BEFORE you select the email report)&lt;br /&gt;
# Select Print/Email and select the report you want to email.&lt;br /&gt;
# The email body is automatically filled out with all the info you need!&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmailTemplateEmail.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modify Email Template ==&lt;br /&gt;
# To modify an email template, just go back to Utilities&amp;gt;Custom&amp;gt;Custom Email Bodies and select Run It.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the email template you want to modify&lt;br /&gt;
# Make changes and select Post when completed.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Email_Template&amp;diff=6307</id>
		<title>Email Template</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Email_Template&amp;diff=6307"/>
		<updated>2017-11-02T19:20:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Email template bodies allow you to create preformed and dynamic text from anything in the database record.  These can be used to create a consistent email with minimal typing while still being personal for each customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create Email Template ==&lt;br /&gt;
To create an email templates follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open SME and go to Utilities&amp;gt;Custom&amp;gt;Custom Email Bodies and select Run It.  (Note if you do not have access to the utilities module, ask your administrator to provide access).&lt;br /&gt;
# Select Add at bottom left to create a new email template&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the module for this email template and give a Name&lt;br /&gt;
# Select options: &lt;br /&gt;
## Use on Module Emails:  To use on the module, you most likely want to check this&lt;br /&gt;
## Use in Batch Emails:  To use with the automatic batch emailing&lt;br /&gt;
## Use in Print Packet Emails:  To use with module&amp;gt;Actions&amp;gt;Print Packet&lt;br /&gt;
## Default in Modules:  To make this email template as the default.   Be sure to select only one default per module.&lt;br /&gt;
## Default on Batch Emails:  To make this the default email template for batch emails.  Be sure to select only one default per module.&lt;br /&gt;
## Default on Print Packets:  To make this the default email template for print packets.    Be sure to select only one default per module.&lt;br /&gt;
# Type in the standard text you want to show in your email.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag and Drop dynamic data into the email template&lt;br /&gt;
## Select the type of Dynamic Data to Pull data from the Record:&lt;br /&gt;
### Select the type of data you want: Standard, Custom, System, Login, or Company&lt;br /&gt;
### Standard:  Data from the module selected&lt;br /&gt;
### Custom:  Data from custom fields from the module selected&lt;br /&gt;
### System:  System data such as current date and time&lt;br /&gt;
### Login:  Information from the logged in user such as Name, email address, phone and so on.  Great for creating company wide consistent signatures.&lt;br /&gt;
### Company:  Data from company settings such as company name, address and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Post&amp;quot; to save your template.&lt;br /&gt;
# Example:  The following example is one we use at High 5 Software to send out support renewal invoices.  Dynamic data is described below:&lt;br /&gt;
## %BillContact% is the billing contact name&lt;br /&gt;
## %Balance% is the balance remaining on the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
## %Login.Name% is the name of the login user so this template can be used by anyone who has access to the module.&lt;br /&gt;
## %Login.EmailAdd% is the email of the logged in user.&lt;br /&gt;
## We could also have used %Company.AddressBlock% instead of typing out our company address so we don&amp;#039;t have to update the template if our address changes, but we decided to type it in manually.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmailTemplate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Use Email Template ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once your email template is setup, it&amp;#039;s easy to use as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the module you created your template for.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the Email Template (be sure to do this BEFORE you select the email report)&lt;br /&gt;
# Select Print/Email and select the report you want to email.&lt;br /&gt;
# The email body is automatically filled out with all the info you need!&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmailTemplateEmail.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modify Email Template ==&lt;br /&gt;
# To modify an email template, just go back to Utilities&amp;gt;Custom&amp;gt;Custom Email Bodies and select Run It.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the email template you want to modify&lt;br /&gt;
# Make changes and select Post when completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== other ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Email_Template&amp;diff=6306</id>
		<title>Email Template</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Email_Template&amp;diff=6306"/>
		<updated>2017-11-02T19:17:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Email template bodies allow you to create preformed and dynamic text from anything in the database record.  These can be used to create a consistent email with minimal typing while still being personal for each customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create Email Template ==&lt;br /&gt;
To create an email templates follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open SME and go to Utilities&amp;gt;Custom&amp;gt;Custom Email Bodies and select Run It.  (Note if you do not have access to the utilities module, ask your administrator to provide access).&lt;br /&gt;
# Select Add at bottom left to create a new email template&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the module for this email template and give a Name&lt;br /&gt;
# Select options: &lt;br /&gt;
## Use on Module Emails:  To use on the module, you most likely want to check this&lt;br /&gt;
## Use in Batch Emails:  To use with the automatic batch emailing&lt;br /&gt;
## Use in Print Packet Emails:  To use with module&amp;gt;Actions&amp;gt;Print Packet&lt;br /&gt;
## Default in Modules:  To make this email template as the default.   Be sure to select only one default per module.&lt;br /&gt;
## Default on Batch Emails:  To make this the default email template for batch emails.  Be sure to select only one default per module.&lt;br /&gt;
## Default on Print Packets:  To make this the default email template for print packets.    Be sure to select only one default per module.&lt;br /&gt;
# Type in the standard text you want to show in your email.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag and Drop dynamic data into the email template&lt;br /&gt;
## Select the type of Dynamic Data to Pull data from the Record:&lt;br /&gt;
### Select the type of data you want: Standard, Custom, System, Login, or Company&lt;br /&gt;
### Standard:  Data from the module selected&lt;br /&gt;
### Custom:  Data from custom fields from the module selected&lt;br /&gt;
### System:  System data such as current date and time&lt;br /&gt;
### Login:  Information from the logged in user such as Name, email address, phone and so on.  Great for creating company wide consistent signatures.&lt;br /&gt;
### Company:  Data from company settings such as company name, address and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Post&amp;quot; to save your template.&lt;br /&gt;
# Example:  The following example is one we use at High 5 Software to send out support renewal invoices.  Dynamic data is described below:&lt;br /&gt;
## %BillContact% is the billing contact name&lt;br /&gt;
## %Balance% is the balance remaining on the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
## %Login.Name% is the name of the login user so this template can be used by anyone who has access to the module.&lt;br /&gt;
## %Login.EmailAdd% is the email of the logged in user.&lt;br /&gt;
## We could also have used %Company.AddressBlock% instead of typing out our company address so we don&amp;#039;t have to update the template if our address changes, but we decided to type it in manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dear %BillContact%&lt;br /&gt;
Enclosed is your invoice for High 5 Software support, products or services.&lt;br /&gt;
The balance on this invoice is %Balance%&lt;br /&gt;
We accept multiple payment methods;* Please send $US check payment to: High 5 Software, PO Box 82525, Kenmore, WA 98028&lt;br /&gt;
* For Credit card or ACH/e-check payment please scan/email payment information back to marks@h5sw.com, fax to 888-415-0927, or call 800-585-1696 x101&lt;br /&gt;
 Thanks for your business!&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
%Login.Name%&lt;br /&gt;
800-585-1696&lt;br /&gt;
Fax:  800-415-0927&lt;br /&gt;
Email: %Login.EmailAdd% &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmailTemplate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Use Email Template ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once your email template is setup, it&amp;#039;s easy to use as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the module you created your template for.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the Email Template (be sure to do this BEFORE you select the email report)&lt;br /&gt;
# Select Print/Email and select the report you want to email.&lt;br /&gt;
# The email body is automatically filled out with all the info you need!&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmailTemplateEmail.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modify Email Template ==&lt;br /&gt;
# To modify an email template, just go back to Utilities&amp;gt;Custom&amp;gt;Custom Email Bodies and select Run It.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the email template you want to modify&lt;br /&gt;
# Make changes and select Post when completed.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Email_Template&amp;diff=6305</id>
		<title>Email Template</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Email_Template&amp;diff=6305"/>
		<updated>2017-11-02T19:16:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Email template bodies allow you to create preformed and dynamic text from anything in the database record.  These can be used to create a consistent email with minimal typing while still being personal for each customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create Email Template ==&lt;br /&gt;
To create an email templates follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open SME and go to Utilities&amp;gt;Custom&amp;gt;Custom Email Bodies and select Run It.  (Note if you do not have access to the utilities module, ask your administrator to provide access).&lt;br /&gt;
# Select Add at bottom left to create a new email template&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the module for this email template and give a Name&lt;br /&gt;
# Select options: &lt;br /&gt;
## Use on Module Emails:  To use on the module, you most likely want to check this&lt;br /&gt;
## Use in Batch Emails:  To use with the automatic batch emailing&lt;br /&gt;
## Use in Print Packet Emails:  To use with module&amp;gt;Actions&amp;gt;Print Packet&lt;br /&gt;
## Default in Modules:  To make this email template as the default.   Be sure to select only one default per module.&lt;br /&gt;
## Default on Batch Emails:  To make this the default email template for batch emails.  Be sure to select only one default per module.&lt;br /&gt;
## Default on Print Packets:  To make this the default email template for print packets.    Be sure to select only one default per module.&lt;br /&gt;
# Type in the standard text you want to show in your email.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag and Drop dynamic data into the email template&lt;br /&gt;
## Select the type of Dynamic Data to Pull data from the Record:&lt;br /&gt;
### Select the type of data you want: Standard, Custom, System, Login, or Company&lt;br /&gt;
### Standard:  Data from the module selected&lt;br /&gt;
### Custom:  Data from custom fields from the module selected&lt;br /&gt;
### System:  System data such as current date and time&lt;br /&gt;
### Login:  Information from the logged in user such as Name, email address, phone and so on.  Great for creating company wide consistent signatures.&lt;br /&gt;
### Company:  Data from company settings such as company name, address and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Post&amp;quot; to save your template.&lt;br /&gt;
# Example:  The following example is one we use at High 5 Software to send out support renewal invoices.  Dynamic data is described below:&lt;br /&gt;
## %BillContact% is the billing contact name&lt;br /&gt;
## %Balance% is the balance remaining on the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
## %Login.Name% is the name of the login user so this template can be used by anyone who has access to the module.&lt;br /&gt;
## %Login.EmailAdd% is the email of the logged in user.&lt;br /&gt;
## We could also have used %Company.AddressBlock% instead of typing out our company address so we don&amp;#039;t have to update the template if our address changes, but we decided to type it in manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dear %BillContact%&lt;br /&gt;
Enclosed is your invoice for High 5 Software support, products or services.&lt;br /&gt;
The balance on this invoice is %Balance%&lt;br /&gt;
We accept multiple payment methods;* Please send $US check payment to: High 5 Software, PO Box 82525, Kenmore, WA 98028&lt;br /&gt;
* For Credit card or ACH/e-check payment please scan/email payment information back to marks@h5sw.com, fax to 888-415-0927, or call 800-585-1696 x101&lt;br /&gt;
 Thanks for your business!&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
%Login.Name%&lt;br /&gt;
800-585-1696&lt;br /&gt;
Fax:  800-415-0927&lt;br /&gt;
Email: %Login.EmailAdd% &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmailTemplate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Use Email Template ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once your email template is setup, it&amp;#039;s easy to use as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the module you created your template for.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the Email Template (be sure to do this BEFORE you select the email report)&lt;br /&gt;
# Select Print/Email and select the report you want to email.&lt;br /&gt;
# The email body is automatically filled out with all the info you need!&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmailTemplateEmail.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Email_Template&amp;diff=6304</id>
		<title>Email Template</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Email_Template&amp;diff=6304"/>
		<updated>2017-11-02T19:09:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: Created page with &amp;quot;Email template bodies allow you to create preformed and dynamic text from anything in the database record.  These can be used to create a consistent email with minimal typing...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Email template bodies allow you to create preformed and dynamic text from anything in the database record.  These can be used to create a consistent email with minimal typing while still being personal for each customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create an email templates follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open SME and go to Utilities&amp;gt;Custom&amp;gt;Custom Email Bodies and select Run It.  (Note if you do not have access to the utilities module, ask your administrator to provide access).&lt;br /&gt;
# Select Add at bottom left to create a new email template&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the module for this email template and give a Name&lt;br /&gt;
# Select options: &lt;br /&gt;
## Use on Module Emails:  To use on the module, you most likely want to check this&lt;br /&gt;
## Use in Batch Emails:  To use with the automatic batch emailing&lt;br /&gt;
## Use in Print Packet Emails:  To use with module&amp;gt;Actions&amp;gt;Print Packet&lt;br /&gt;
## Default in Modules:  To make this email template as the default.   Be sure to select only one default per module.&lt;br /&gt;
## Default on Batch Emails:  To make this the default email template for batch emails.  Be sure to select only one default per module.&lt;br /&gt;
## Default on Print Packets:  To make this the default email template for print packets.    Be sure to select only one default per module.&lt;br /&gt;
# Type in the standard text you want to show in your email.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag and Drop dynamic data into the email template&lt;br /&gt;
## Select the type of Dynamic Data to Pull data from the Record:&lt;br /&gt;
### Select the type of data you want: Standard, Custom, System, Login, or Company&lt;br /&gt;
### Standard:  Data from the module selected&lt;br /&gt;
### Custom:  Data from custom fields from the module selected&lt;br /&gt;
### System:  System data such as current date and time&lt;br /&gt;
### Login:  Information from the logged in user such as Name, email address, phone and so on.  Great for creating company wide consistent signatures.&lt;br /&gt;
### Company:  Data from company settings such as company name, address and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Post&amp;quot; to save your template.&lt;br /&gt;
# Example:  The following example is one we use at High 5 Software to send out support renewal invoices.  Dynamic data is described below:&lt;br /&gt;
## %BillContact% is the billing contact name&lt;br /&gt;
## %Balance% is the balance remaining on the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
## %Login.Name% is the name of the login user so this template can be used by anyone who has access to the module.&lt;br /&gt;
## %Login.EmailAdd% is the email of the logged in user.&lt;br /&gt;
## We could also have used %Company.AddressBlock% instead of typing out our company address so we don&amp;#039;t have to update the template if our address changes, but we decided to type it in manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dear %BillContact%&lt;br /&gt;
Enclosed is your invoice for High 5 Software support, products or services.&lt;br /&gt;
The balance on this invoice is %Balance%&lt;br /&gt;
We accept multiple payment methods;* Please send $US check payment to: High 5 Software, PO Box 82525, Kenmore, WA 98028&lt;br /&gt;
* For Credit card or ACH/e-check payment please scan/email payment information back to marks@h5sw.com, fax to 888-415-0927, or call 800-585-1696 x101&lt;br /&gt;
 Thanks for your business!&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
%Login.Name%&lt;br /&gt;
800-585-1696&lt;br /&gt;
Fax:  800-415-0927&lt;br /&gt;
Email: %Login.EmailAdd% &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmailTemplate.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Email_or_Print_Invoice&amp;diff=6303</id>
		<title>Email or Print Invoice</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Email_or_Print_Invoice&amp;diff=6303"/>
		<updated>2017-11-02T18:44:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Once the invoice is created it should be immediately sent to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print/Email&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       In the menu, everything above the horizontal line is a report you can print. Select anything below the horizontal line to email the report to your customer.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Setup [[Email Template]] to create canned and dynamic preformed text for your email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PrintInvoice.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A common invoiced used is the Standard Invoice – Order Items report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;To remove some of the reports from the Print/Email menu:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       To to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reports&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customize Reports&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search &amp;gt; Search Standard&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Double click on the report you want to remove from the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Availability&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Uncheck &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoicing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; (circled below).&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReportAvailability.jpg]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Update_Inventory_Pricing&amp;diff=6302</id>
		<title>Update Inventory Pricing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Update_Inventory_Pricing&amp;diff=6302"/>
		<updated>2017-11-02T16:39:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Updating inventory pricing is similar to importing inventory but with less information to import.  You basically use the SME UID field plus cost and price for the items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It&amp;#039;s useful to understand UID&amp;#039;s, see [[Before Importing - About UID]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To import NEW inventory items see [[Importing Inventory Items]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manually updating pricing with excel ==&lt;br /&gt;
Just updating cost and price for inventory items:&lt;br /&gt;
* pictures coming soon...&lt;br /&gt;
# Export your inventory list using exporting, see [[SME Import Export Process]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Pick the following fields for export: UID, ItemName or ItemNumber (so you know which part), Cost, Retail1 (standard price)&lt;br /&gt;
## You may want to export Vendor or Manufacturer name if you plan to update pricing for just one vendor or manufacturer&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the file in excel&lt;br /&gt;
# Filter the data for the items you want to update.  Do internet search for excel filtering if you need to know how.&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy the filtered data into a separate excel file&lt;br /&gt;
# Update the cost and pricing in excel and save&lt;br /&gt;
# Import this file into SME using the importing process.&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Importing Inventory Items]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Update_Inventory_Pricing&amp;diff=6301</id>
		<title>Update Inventory Pricing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Update_Inventory_Pricing&amp;diff=6301"/>
		<updated>2017-11-02T16:37:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Updating inventory pricing is similar to importing inventory but with less information to import.  You basically use the SME UID field plus cost and price for the items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It&amp;#039;s useful to understand UID&amp;#039;s, see [[Before Importing - About UID]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To import NEW inventory items see [[Importing Inventory Items]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manually updating pricing with excel ==&lt;br /&gt;
Just updating cost and price for inventory items:&lt;br /&gt;
* pictures coming soon...&lt;br /&gt;
# Export your inventory list using exporting, see [[SME Import Export Process]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Pick the following fields for export: UID, ItemName or ItemNumber (so you know which part), Cost, Retail1 (standard price)&lt;br /&gt;
## You may want to export Vendor or Manufacturer name if you plan to update pricing for just one vendor or manufacturer&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the file in excel&lt;br /&gt;
## [[File:InventoryExportPriceUpdate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Filter the data for the items you want to update.  Do internet search for excel filtering if you need to know how.&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy the filtered data into a separate excel file&lt;br /&gt;
# Update the cost and pricing in excel and save&lt;br /&gt;
## [[File:PriceUpdate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Import this file into SME using the importing process.&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Importing Inventory Items]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Updating pricing from a vendor excel sheet ==&lt;br /&gt;
# ..coming soon..&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Mobile_-_Limit_Order_Status&amp;diff=6298</id>
		<title>SME Mobile - Limit Order Status</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Mobile_-_Limit_Order_Status&amp;diff=6298"/>
		<updated>2017-09-29T15:18:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Latest version of Mobile Tech for SME now allows technicians to only select order status for which they are allowed.  When this is set all the order statuses will show, however only the order statuses allowed will be selectable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the following example Techs can only set Accepted, Closed, and Need Parts status, all other status are grayed out and not selectable.  This only affects Mobile Tech for SME as users in the office will still be able to select any order status.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[file:AllowOrderStatus.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This example allows the tech to only select Accepted, Closed, or Need Parts statuses.  Other status are grayed out so that if the order is on one of those statuses, the tech will know but will only be able to change to one of their statuses allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure this option through SQL Management Studio, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open SQL Server Management Studio and select the SME database and select New Query&lt;br /&gt;
# Find the Order Status UID with this query:  select * from OrderStatus &lt;br /&gt;
# Run the following query, be sure to replace your uid from the orderstatus where it shows &amp;lt;orderstatus UID here&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
## insert into SMESettings (UID, GroupUID, Tag, Value, Label) values (exec GetSMEUID() ,&amp;#039;ADMIN&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;lt;orderstatus UID here&amp;gt;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
## Example:  insert into SMESettings (UID, GroupUID, Tag, Value, Label) values (exec GetSMEUID() ,&amp;#039;ADMIN&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;LI111909025410392009&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
# To verify it&amp;#039;s set properly run query select * from SMESettings or look in SME Setup&amp;gt;Company&amp;gt;User Groups&amp;gt;Additional Settings for Admin group.  You can also see the changes in Mobile Tech order status drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure this option through webservices call, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# Statuses w/ permission to use can be remotely set via UID using [wsurl]/UpdateSMESettings/AllowOrderStatus/[OrderStatusUID] (without brackets)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Mobile_-_Limit_Order_Status&amp;diff=6297</id>
		<title>SME Mobile - Limit Order Status</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Mobile_-_Limit_Order_Status&amp;diff=6297"/>
		<updated>2017-09-29T15:16:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Latest version of Mobile Tech for SME now allows technicians to only select order status for which they are allowed.  When this is set all the order statuses will show, however only the order statuses allowed will be selectable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the following example Techs can only set Accepted, Closed, and Need Parts status, all other status are grayed out and not selectable.  This only affects Mobile Tech for SME as users in the office will still be able to select any order status.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[file:AllowOrderStatus.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure this option through SQL Management Studio, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open SQL Server Management Studio and select the SME database and select New Query&lt;br /&gt;
# Find the Order Status UID with this query:  select * from OrderStatus &lt;br /&gt;
# Run the following query, be sure to replace your uid from the orderstatus where it shows &amp;lt;orderstatus UID here&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
## insert into SMESettings (UID, GroupUID, Tag, Value, Label) values (exec GetSMEUID() ,&amp;#039;ADMIN&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;lt;orderstatus UID here&amp;gt;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
## Example:  insert into SMESettings (UID, GroupUID, Tag, Value, Label) values (exec GetSMEUID() ,&amp;#039;ADMIN&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;LI111909025410392009&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
# To verify it&amp;#039;s set properly run query select * from SMESettings or look in SME Setup&amp;gt;Company&amp;gt;User Groups&amp;gt;Additional Settings for Admin group.  You can also see the changes in Mobile Tech order status drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure this option through webservices call, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# Statuses w/ permission to use can be remotely set via UID using [wsurl]/UpdateSMESettings/AllowOrderStatus/[OrderStatusUID] (without brackets)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Mobile_-_Limit_Order_Status&amp;diff=6296</id>
		<title>SME Mobile - Limit Order Status</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Mobile_-_Limit_Order_Status&amp;diff=6296"/>
		<updated>2017-09-29T15:13:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Latest version of Mobile Tech for SME now allows technicians to only select order status for which they are allowed.  When this is set all the order statuses will show, however only the order statuses allowed will be selectable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the following example Techs can only set Accepted, Closed, and Need Parts status, all other status are grayed out and not selectable.  This only affects Mobile Tech for SME as users in the office will still be able to select any order status.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[file:AllowOrderStatus.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure this option through SQL Management Studio, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open SQL Server Management Studio and select the SME database and select New Query&lt;br /&gt;
# Find the Order Status UID with this query:  select * from OrderStatus &lt;br /&gt;
# Run the following query, be sure to replace your uid from the orderstatus where it shows &amp;lt;orderstatus UID here&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
## insert into SMESettings (UID, GroupUID, Tag, Value, Label) values (exec GetSMEUID() ,&amp;#039;ADMIN&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;lt;orderstatus UID here&amp;gt;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
## Example:  insert into SMESettings (UID, GroupUID, Tag, Value, Label) values (exec GetSMEUID() ,&amp;#039;ADMIN&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;LI111909025410392009&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
# To verify it&amp;#039;s set properly run query select * from SMESettings or look in SME Setup&amp;gt;Company&amp;gt;User Groups&amp;gt;Additional Settings for Admin group.  You can also see the changes in Mobile Tech order status drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure this option through webservices call, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# ...instructions coming soon.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:AllowOrderStatus.png&amp;diff=6295</id>
		<title>File:AllowOrderStatus.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:AllowOrderStatus.png&amp;diff=6295"/>
		<updated>2017-09-29T15:12:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Mobile_-_Limit_Order_Status&amp;diff=6294</id>
		<title>SME Mobile - Limit Order Status</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Mobile_-_Limit_Order_Status&amp;diff=6294"/>
		<updated>2017-09-29T15:12:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Latest version of Mobile Tech for SME now allows technicians to only select order status for which they are allowed.  When this is set all the order statuses will show, however only the order statuses allowed will be selectable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the following example Techs can only set Accepted, Closed, and Need Parts status, all other status are grayed out and not selectable.  This only affects Mobile Tech for SME as users in the office will still be able to select any order status.&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:AllowOrderStatus.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure this option through SQL Management Studio, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open SQL Server Management Studio and select the SME database and select New Query&lt;br /&gt;
# Find the Order Status UID with this query:  select * from OrderStatus &lt;br /&gt;
# Run the following query, be sure to replace your uid from the orderstatus where it shows &amp;lt;orderstatus UID here&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
## insert into SMESettings (UID, GroupUID, Tag, Value, Label) values (exec GetSMEUID() ,&amp;#039;ADMIN&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;lt;orderstatus UID here&amp;gt;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
## Example:  insert into SMESettings (UID, GroupUID, Tag, Value, Label) values (exec GetSMEUID() ,&amp;#039;ADMIN&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;LI111909025410392009&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
# To verify it&amp;#039;s set properly run query select * from SMESettings or look in SME Setup&amp;gt;Company&amp;gt;User Groups&amp;gt;Additional Settings for Admin group.  You can also see the changes in Mobile Tech order status drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure this option through webservices call, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# ...instructions coming soon.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Mobile_-_Limit_Order_Status&amp;diff=6293</id>
		<title>SME Mobile - Limit Order Status</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Mobile_-_Limit_Order_Status&amp;diff=6293"/>
		<updated>2017-09-29T15:11:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: Created page with &amp;quot;Latest version of Mobile Tech for SME now allows technicians to only select order status for which they are allowed.  When this is set all the order statuses will show, howeve...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Latest version of Mobile Tech for SME now allows technicians to only select order status for which they are allowed.  When this is set all the order statuses will show, however only the order statuses allowed will be selectable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the following example Techs can only set Accepted, Closed, and Need Parts status, all other status are grayed out and not selectable.  This only affects Mobile Tech for SME as users in the office will still be able to select any order status.&lt;br /&gt;
[[AllowOrderStatus.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure this option through SQL Management Studio, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open SQL Server Management Studio and select the SME database and select New Query&lt;br /&gt;
# Find the Order Status UID with this query:  select * from OrderStatus &lt;br /&gt;
# Run the following query, be sure to replace your uid from the orderstatus where it shows &amp;lt;orderstatus UID here&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
## insert into SMESettings (UID, GroupUID, Tag, Value, Label) values (exec GetSMEUID() ,&amp;#039;ADMIN&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;lt;orderstatus UID here&amp;gt;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
## Example:  insert into SMESettings (UID, GroupUID, Tag, Value, Label) values (exec GetSMEUID() ,&amp;#039;ADMIN&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;LI111909025410392009&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;AllowOrderStatus&amp;#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
# To verify it&amp;#039;s set properly run query select * from SMESettings or look in SME Setup&amp;gt;Company&amp;gt;User Groups&amp;gt;Additional Settings for Admin group.  You can also see the changes in Mobile Tech order status drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure this option through webservices call, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# ...instructions coming soon.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Add-On_Guides&amp;diff=6292</id>
		<title>SME Add-On Guides</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Add-On_Guides&amp;diff=6292"/>
		<updated>2017-09-29T14:45:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Mobile Tech for SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SME Mobile Prerequisites]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SME Mobile Master - Assign User Names]] - Assigning User Names and Passwords to Techs for access to SME Mobile&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SME Mobile - Preference Groups]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SME Mobile - Limit Order Status]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SME Mobile]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SME Mobile - Change User Password]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Mobile Tech - Time In/Out]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Location Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Mobile Sales for SME]] Provides a web-based tool that can be used with any internet connected device including smartphone, tablet, Mac, and PC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Time Tracker for SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Customer Cloud for SME]]:  Latest customer access for SME8 and above.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[CustomerPortal for SME]]:  This is the older customer portal.  Suggest to move to the [[Customer Cloud for SME]] instead.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[CustomerPortal Settings]]:  This is the older customer portal.  Suggest to move to the [[Customer Cloud for SME]] instead.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Warehouse Manager for SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Barcode for SME Reconciliation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Motorola Support for Barcode Scanner: http://www.motorola.com/Business/US-EN/Pages/Contact_Us#support_tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
* [[CustomerPortal and TechPortal Install Guide]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Automated Email for SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Auditing for SME Setup]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Third Party Applications and Solutions&lt;br /&gt;
** [[TAPI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[POS with SME Mobile]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Inventory_Quantity_Reconciliation&amp;diff=6288</id>
		<title>Inventory Quantity Reconciliation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Inventory_Quantity_Reconciliation&amp;diff=6288"/>
		<updated>2017-07-26T14:53:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Usually at year end a physical inventory is performed and then reconciled with SME. Any adjustments required should be understood, however SME provides an inventory reconcile tool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*NOTE* If you are tracking inventory quantities in QuickBooks, any adjustments made to SME inventory using reconciliation will also need to be made in QuickBooks inventory.  Only invoices from SME automatically deplete inventory in QuickBooks. Only POs or Bills from SME automatically increase inventory in QuickBooks. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;H1&amp;gt; New Inventory Reconcile in SME 8.1 and Beyond &amp;lt;/H1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Features and Benefits of New Inventory Reconcile ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Easier operation for reconciling inventory&lt;br /&gt;
* Full tracking of adjustments into &amp;quot;Virtual Physical Count&amp;quot; warehouse. &lt;br /&gt;
** This special warehouse shows all your scrapped or adjusted inventory&lt;br /&gt;
** This warehouse should NOT be used for inventory reporting&lt;br /&gt;
** This warehouse SHOULD be used for reporting of adjustments or scrap of inventory&lt;br /&gt;
** Over time your business may adjust parts both positive and negative.  This warehouse will get added stock counts when you decrease regular stock warehouse and decrease if the parts are found again.&lt;br /&gt;
** If parts are found again, inventory reconciliation can be used to move back into a warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
** You do not have to worry about inventory stock &amp;quot;disappearing&amp;quot; from inventory tracking and reconciliation since all inventory is tracked in and out.&lt;br /&gt;
** This warehouse is forced as inactive so that it&amp;#039;s not used in standard inventory reports&lt;br /&gt;
** Note: If you have a custom inventory report it will need to be updated to NOT count this virtual warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
* Batching&lt;br /&gt;
** Batches will allow inventory to be snapshoted for adjustments over multiple days.  You can create a batch, make adjustments and then come back later and continue to make adjustments for that batch.  &lt;br /&gt;
*** For example, you may want to run a quarterly inventory reconcile with the following process:&lt;br /&gt;
*** Get the actual physcial count of all or part of your warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
*** Create a new Batch.  This should be done at the same time as your physical count so that it can take a snapshot of SME inventory at the same time as your physical count.&lt;br /&gt;
*** Make adjustments in inventory reconcile AT ANY TIME.  Thus you can adjust a couple parts today, couple more tomorrow and so on until done.  You do not need to make all the adjustments in SME since you have the physical and batch snapshot at the same time.  Just don&amp;#039;t close the batch if you are still making adjustments and just close the batch when all adjustments are made.&lt;br /&gt;
*** Do additional physical count adjustments on the future days and then close the batch when all your adjustments are complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inventory Reconciliation version 8.1 Operation ==&lt;br /&gt;
# Select Utilities&amp;gt;Utilities&amp;gt;Inventory&amp;gt;Inventory Reconciliation and click Run It&lt;br /&gt;
# [[File:Reconcile1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Column descriptions in Inventory Reconciliation (Note: Your columns may be in different order since SME lets you read just your columns and what shows in that reconcile view):&lt;br /&gt;
## CountCycle:  This is an inventory field for setting the cycle count frequency.  This likely will be blank if you are not using this info in SME.  In inventory management you would set CountCycle as a number system or just how often the parts should be counted like monthly, quarterly or annually.&lt;br /&gt;
## Number:  Inventory number&lt;br /&gt;
## Last Reconciliation:  Last time that part has been reconciled with this tool.&lt;br /&gt;
## Item:  Item name&lt;br /&gt;
## Location:  Warehouse location&lt;br /&gt;
## Live Count:  This is the CURRENT count of inventory for reference only.  Because you are able to save a batch which is a snapshot of the inventory in the past, the live count will be SME&amp;#039;s current inventory value.  This will be helpful to see how much change has been made on that part from the point when you created the batch until now.&lt;br /&gt;
## Phys. Count:  This is where you enter your adjustment values and should be your current physical count.&lt;br /&gt;
## Exp. Count:  Expected Count is the amount you are supposed to have in inventory.  Any difference filled in for the physical count from the expected count will create an adjustment different.&lt;br /&gt;
## Difference:  When you enter a value in physical count this will be the difference that will be reconciled.  If it&amp;#039;s negative, inventory count will be reduced and if it&amp;#039;s positive inventory count will be increased.&lt;br /&gt;
## Accept:  When you run &amp;quot;Reconcile Batch&amp;quot; it will process all items with accept checked.  If you are trying to reconcile to zero, you can manually check accept to make adjustment to zero.&lt;br /&gt;
## Reconciled:  If that part has already been reconciled.&lt;br /&gt;
## Available:  Stock count at the time when the inventory batch was created.&lt;br /&gt;
## Reserved:  Number of stock reserved at the time of the batch.  Note: SME Inventory Reconcile is not able to reconcile reserved parts since it would not know which order to change from reserved to un-reserved.&lt;br /&gt;
## ItemDesc:  Description of the item&lt;br /&gt;
## Notes:  Item notes&lt;br /&gt;
## Closed:  Batch is closed and no more changes can take place on items marked as closed.  Closed items are locked for any more reconcile changes.&lt;br /&gt;
# Batch:  Select New for a new batch or if you already created a batch you want to continue then select that batch.&lt;br /&gt;
## Select New&amp;gt;All Inclusive to adjust all warehouses.  Note: If you have lots of data, this is not recommended.&lt;br /&gt;
## Select New&amp;gt;For Location Only to adjust one warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
# Filter on Location:  Inventory adjustments need to be done per warehouse, so select the warehouse you are adjusting.  Note that you will need separate batches for each warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
# Make adjustments in the &amp;quot;Phys. Count&amp;quot; column by editing the count value.&lt;br /&gt;
## If you want a 0, Zero count then keep the Phys Count as zero and check &amp;quot;Accept&amp;quot; checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
## Serialized parts will show individually since they are each unique.  Be sure to adjust the specific serialized parts.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have all the counts, select Reconcile Batch&lt;br /&gt;
## If you are done with your adjustments for this warehouse or period, click Yes to &amp;quot;Close batch when completed&amp;quot;.  If you plan to make additional adjustments select No.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the top bar for filtering or sorting just like search views&lt;br /&gt;
# Print Reconciliation Report will print the &lt;br /&gt;
## Note, and inventory template report bust be defined in Setup&amp;gt;Company&amp;gt;Printing&amp;gt;Inventory Template&lt;br /&gt;
# Export to Excel to get an excel report of all the adjustments and inventory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Advanced Functionality with Physical Count Data Uploads ===&lt;br /&gt;
New instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Export Location table to get the UID&amp;#039;s of your warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
# Export Inventory items mainly the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
## UID  (Note: You MUST change this to ItemUID in excel after exported)&lt;br /&gt;
## Name  (optional, this is exported for reference but not used)&lt;br /&gt;
## Number (optional, this is exported for reference but not used)&lt;br /&gt;
## Export as a csv file.  For this example export as InventoryRecon.csv&lt;br /&gt;
# Open InventoryRecon.csv in excel and add do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
## Add a column called LocationUID.  Copy the Location UID from step one for all items you want to count&lt;br /&gt;
## Change column name of UID to ItemUID.&lt;br /&gt;
## Add a column called iCount and enter all the physical counts for each item.  Note that this should not be negative.&lt;br /&gt;
# Import InventoryRecon into the InvenRecon table as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
## Go to Utilities&amp;gt;Import&amp;gt;Import Data and select Run It&lt;br /&gt;
## Select the button next to Source Filename and Load the InventoryRecon.csv files from above. Note in the bottom right corner change teh file type from Excel to csv (or All) to find this file.  Select Open&lt;br /&gt;
## [[File:ReconcileImportFile.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
## For Destination Table select InvenRecon and check include UID fields&lt;br /&gt;
## [[File:ReconcileImportFields.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Set the field mappings as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
### ItemUID&lt;br /&gt;
### Name and Number should be set not to import&lt;br /&gt;
### iCount&lt;br /&gt;
### LocationUID is the warehouse location&lt;br /&gt;
### [[File:ReconcileImportData.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
### [[File:ReconcileImportFields.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
## HIGHLY recommended to save this template.  Select Save Template and give name like InventoryReconcile&lt;br /&gt;
## Select Start to import this file&lt;br /&gt;
# Now that the inventory reconcile data is loaded it&amp;#039;s time to reconcile the warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to Utilities&amp;gt;Inventory&amp;gt;Inventory Reconcile and select Run it&lt;br /&gt;
## Select the warehouse you want to reconcile under Filter on Location&lt;br /&gt;
## Create a new batch for the warehouse location you want to reconcile by selecting New&amp;gt;For Location Only.  Note that this takes a snapshot of inventory and can take a while.&lt;br /&gt;
## [[File:ReconcileUpdate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Optional:  To see the data you imported into InvenRecon select View Physical Counts&lt;br /&gt;
## Select Update Physical counts.  This will take the data from InvenRecon imported above and setup the physical counts.  Note that this may take a while with lots of parts.&lt;br /&gt;
## Go through and accept for each part that you want to update for the new physical count.&lt;br /&gt;
## When completed accepting, select Reconcile Batch&lt;br /&gt;
## [[File:ReconcileBatch.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Old instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* Note: This functionality is requires data to be entered through an external program.  At this time, no external program has been created so this functionality is not available without addition work.&lt;br /&gt;
* View Physical Counts will load the physical count data table to be used for reconcile.&lt;br /&gt;
* Update Physical Counts will update the data table.&lt;br /&gt;
* Export to Excel can be used for an excel report or to use for importing a physical count file as described below.  Steps to export to excel for a physical count file:&lt;br /&gt;
** Create new batch or select existing batch.  For new batch you can select for all locations (recommended in your case I think) or a specific location/warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
** Select Export to Excel&lt;br /&gt;
** Use this file for manipulation to upload in the next step&lt;br /&gt;
* Physical Count Table Structure.  Note this is technical since it would most likely be populated by software developer from external system or uploaded from excel.&lt;br /&gt;
** Table name:  InvenRecon&lt;br /&gt;
** Serialized items:  Load process for Serialized items is to just load the serial numbers and location.  SME logic will find the item information based on matching serial number.  So you can just upload a bunch of serial numbers and location that you have in stock&lt;br /&gt;
*** SerialNumber&lt;br /&gt;
*** LocationUID: The location of where the serialized part is currently located.  If SME reconcile finds this part in another location, it will MOVE it to this location during reconcile.&lt;br /&gt;
** Non-serialized items:  Import or load the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
*** LocationUID:  UID of the warehouse/location&lt;br /&gt;
*** ItemUID:  UID of the inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
*** iCount:  Physical inventory count&lt;br /&gt;
** Field that should not be imported or loaded:&lt;br /&gt;
*** BatchID:  This should NOT be filled in or imported.  SME will look for all records with no batchid to assign to a batch.&lt;br /&gt;
*** Reconciled:  Would usually be false or 0 when data uploaded, then SME will set to true once reconciled.&lt;br /&gt;
*** Notes:  This will be filled in by the reconcile process, so should not be imported or loaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;H1&amp;gt; Inventory Reconciliation BEFORE SME 8.1  &amp;lt;/H1&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Following Section Applies to before SME 8.1&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjusting a single inventory item ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are adjusting a single inventory item, you can open the Inventory Reconciliation window from the inventory item.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to the Inventory item in SME.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Reconciliation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Inventory Reconciliation window opens for that item only.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ActionsInventoryReconciliation.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. In Inventory Reconciliation window, you will need to expand the item (first arrow below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Expand the warehouse the stock is in (second arrow below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Type the accurate amount of stock in the warehouse in Physical Count column (circled below) and then hit &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on your keyboard. After you hit tab, the next column shows you the adjusted amount and the Accept column is checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Post Changes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:InventoryReconciliationFromItem.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Alternative to manage stock adjustments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option for adjusting stock quantities for inventory items is to setup a separate warehouse in SME to move the excess stock to. This way, if the adjustment was done in error, it is very simply to move the stock back to your working warehouse location. When you do your usual physical count, set the ‘Stock Adjustment’ warehouse counts to zero using the inventory reconciliation utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Set up a new warehouse and name it Stock Adjustment or something similar:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Go to the Setup Module and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Locate Warehouses in the Lookup Lists.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the lower right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Enter the new &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;warehouse&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; name such as Stock Adjustment.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;To move stock out of working warehouses into Stock Adjustment warehouse:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Locate the inventory item with wrong stock quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Material Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Enter the quantity to move and select the new warehouse from the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Destination&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MoveStockAdjustment.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will now have a detail line showing the stock adjustment. You will need to inform users to not use the stock in the ‘Stock Adjustments’ warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjusting multiple inventory items ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to Inventory module and select the item you need to adjust.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Copy the Item Number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ItemNumber.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If your Item Names are unique, you can use that and substitute Name for Number for the remainder of the procedure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;(1)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;(2)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Reconciliation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;(3)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It (4&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReconciliationSteps.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Inventory Reconciliation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window will open listing all of your inventory items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Click [[File:DownArrow.jpg]] in the Number column header and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;(Custom..)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FilterByNumber.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.  In the Custom Filter window, enter the Item Number in the field circled in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterNumber.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notice the inventory list filtered down to the item you need to adjust.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9. Click [[File:PlusSign.jpg]] on the inventory item row (1 in image below).  The editing window will expand.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10. Click [[File:PlusSign.jpg]] to expand the warehouse locations. (2)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11. Enter the accurate inventory count in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Physical Count&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Bold text&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column (3).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12. Check the box in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accept&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13.  Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Post Changes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; (4).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PhysicalCount.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to message in Information window.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;15. When the screen clears, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Close&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The quantities will be adjusted.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Privacy_Policy&amp;diff=6287</id>
		<title>Privacy Policy</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Privacy_Policy&amp;diff=6287"/>
		<updated>2017-07-21T16:49:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: Privacy Policy&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Privacy Policy==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
High 5 is committed to respecting and protecting your privacy. You can visit the majority of our website without identifying yourself or revealing any personal information. If you choose to provide us personally identifiable information (any information by which you can be identified), you can be assured that it will ONLY be used to support your customer relationship with High 5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
High 5 provides this Online Privacy Statement to make you aware of our privacy policy, practices and of the choices you can make about the way your information is collected and used. To make this notice easy to find, we make it available on our homepage and from the bottom of every High 5 web page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What information we collect&lt;br /&gt;
On some High 5 web site pages, you can order products or services, make requests, and register to receive materials. The types of personal information collected at these pages are name, contact and company information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How we use it&lt;br /&gt;
High 5 uses your information to better understand your needs and provide you with better service. Specifically, we use your information to communicate back to you, to update you on service and benefits, and to personalize our web site for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From time to time, we may also use your information to contact you to provide you with marketing information we think would be of particular interest. At a minimum, we will always give you the opportunity to opt out of receiving such direct marketing. To unsubscribe send an email to notify us of your unsubscribe request to support@high5software.com.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accuracy &amp;amp; Access&lt;br /&gt;
High 5 strives to keep your personally identifiable information accurate. We will provide you with access to your information, including making every effort to provide you with online access to your registration data so that you may view, update or correct your information at the High 5 site where it was submitted. To protect your privacy and security, we will also take reasonable steps to verify your identity before granting you access or enabling you to make corrections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Certain areas of the High 5 web site may limit access to specific individuals through the use of passwords.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Links to third party web sites on the site are provided solely as a convenience to you. If you use these links, you will leave the High 5 site. High 5 has not reviewed all of these third party sites and does not control and is not responsible for any of these sites, their content or their privacy policy. Thus, High 5 does not endorse or make any representations about them, or any information, software or other products or materials found there, or any results that may be obtained from using them. If you decide to access any of the third party sites linked to this site, you do so at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Security&lt;br /&gt;
High 5 is committed to ensuring the security of your information. To prevent unauthorized access or disclosure, maintain data accuracy, and ensure the appropriate use of information, we have put in place appropriate physical, electronic, and managerial procedures to safeguard and secure the information we collect online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How High 5 uses cookies&lt;br /&gt;
A cookie is a piece of text asking permission to be placed on your computer&amp;#039;s hard drive, your browser adds the text in a small file. The purpose of a cookie is to help us analyze web traffic or let us know when you visit a particular site. Cookies allow a web application to respond to you as an individual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
High 5 uses traffic log cookies to identify what pages are being used and which ones aren&amp;#039;t. This helps us aggregate and analyzes data about web page traffic and make improvements to our web site to better meet customer needs. In this case, High 5 uses this information only for statistical analysis purposes. High 5 also uses cookies to remember your username login for the interactive area and the Customer Area. This is entirely for your convenience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may set your web browser (Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator) to notify you of cookie placement requests or decline cookies completely. You can delete the files that contains cookies; those files are stored as part of your internet browser&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=DynaCloud&amp;diff=6286</id>
		<title>DynaCloud</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=DynaCloud&amp;diff=6286"/>
		<updated>2017-07-21T16:10:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: DynaCloud&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;DynaCloud from High 5 Software&lt;br /&gt;
Dynacloud is a new platform from High 5 Software to manage all your communications and business processes from one solution.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=GL_Entries_for_SME_Inventory&amp;diff=6272</id>
		<title>GL Entries for SME Inventory</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=GL_Entries_for_SME_Inventory&amp;diff=6272"/>
		<updated>2017-06-02T16:52:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Inventory items can be maintained solely in SME and this setting is only for items maintained in SME, not for items in both SME and QuickBooks.  This approach uses journal entries to keep QuickBooks Accounting up to date financially while SME tracks inventory counts. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To configure SME to correctly record the inventory accounting transactions in QuickBooks you must set the correct options in SQLink. Set the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Use General Ledger entries for Default Material Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; as shown in the image below. With this setting, SQLink will create General Ledger Account entries in QuickBooks when items are received on SME Purchase Orders (Debit Inventory Asset / Credit Accounts Payable) and when you invoice material in SME (Credit inventory Asset / Debit Cost of Goods Sold). These settings require that the default material item must be a Non-Inventory item. You can use the default established when SME/SQLink is installed, or you can set up an item of your own choosing, but it must be a Non-Inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using this option applies only if you keep your inventory items in SME only, not in both SME and QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:UseGeneralLedgerOption.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Setup your default Inventory Asset and COGS Account&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Open SQLink&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Classes and Accounts Options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Set your &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Inventory Asset Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Default COGS Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SetDefaultCOGSAndAssetAccounts.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Setup your Default Material Line Item&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. In SQLink, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice/ Proposal Options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Material Line Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. The item set in that field by default is a non-inventory item called “SMP_Item”. You can leave that item or set another non-inventory item you already have setup, however the item must be a Non-Inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SetDefaultMaterialLineItemSQLInk.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Set Income Account on your Default Material Line Item&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you keep SMP_Item as your Default Material Line Item you will need to set the income account on SMP_Item in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: Do NOT check &amp;quot;This item is used in assemblies or is purchased for a specific customer/job&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Open QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item List&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Look for &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMP_Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and open the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Set the Income account in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field (image below). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Make sure you keep the item as a &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;non-inventory part&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Do not change this.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SMPItem_SetIncomeAccount.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Setup your Purchase Order Options in SME and SQLink&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. In SME, go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export Bills on POs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; (Image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DefaultExportBillsOnPOs_SMESETUP.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;SQLink PO Bill Settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 1. In SQLink, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Purchase Order Options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; section, check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Bills Only&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SQLINK_OnExportExportBillsOnly.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To see how Bills for POs export to QuickBooks, view the video at this link:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings#Export_Options_for_Purchase_Orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Set Purchase Orders Settings in SQLink &amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. In SQLink, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Include SMP Items on Purchase Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:IncludeSMPOnPO_GLSettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Set if you want the COGS entry to be made on the invoice date or the date the material was added to the invoice&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Setup &amp;gt; Company &amp;gt; Inventory and choose the option for Cost of Goods Sold GL Entry date&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:COGSDate_GLENtriesSetting.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If Base COGS on Date of Invoice is unchecked, then the date on the COGS entry in QuickBooks will be the date the material was added to the order or itemized invoice. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:BaseCOGSOnDateOfInvoice_UNCHECKED.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If Base COGS on Date of Invoice is checked, then the date on the COGS entry in QuickBooks will be the invoice date, not the date the material was added to the service order or itemized invoice/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the image below, the material was added to the order on 5/29 and the order was invoiced on 6/5. The COGS entry is using the Invoice Date.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:BaseCogsOnDateOfInvoice_CHECKED.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Purchase Order for Inventory and Non-Inventory Items ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you create a PO in SME, the PO will be in SME only.&lt;br /&gt;
Receive an item on the PO and on your next sync, a bill will go to QB for the item you received. The image below shows the bill in QuickBooks for the SME Purchase Order #4128.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:QB_BillForItemsReceivedOnPo.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The following entries are made in QB from the Bill:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:GLENtriesone.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A Credit was made to Accounts Payable account and a Debit made to the Inventory Asset account as shown in the report below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:QBAccount_Bill.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Invoice for the Inventory Item - GL Entries ==&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice the material in SME. On your next sync, the invoice will sync to QB (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:QBInvoiceForMaterial.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The following GL entries are made in QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MaterialInvoiceGL.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A Credit was made to the Inventory Asset account and a Debit made to the Cost of Goods Sold account as shown in the report below. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:InvoiceGL.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Voiding or Reexporting an Invoice in SME ==&lt;br /&gt;
The COGS and Inventory Asset entries go over to QuickBooks when the invoice is synced from SME to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;For SQLink versions of 8.0.3.7 or higher:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- If you Void the invoice in SME and then do a full sync, the COGS and Inventory Asset entries will be cleared in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- When you re invoice the order in SME, the COGS and Inventory Asset entries will be entered in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- If you re-export an invoice from SME to QB, the original GL Entries will be cleared and recreated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== To Convert from syncing items to journal/GL entry ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an existing SME customer syncing SME items with QB items, you can run the following script to &amp;quot;disconnect&amp;quot; SME items from QB item.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: USE WITH CAUTION, Run backups prior, should be ONLY done by qualified database administrators or SME support.&lt;br /&gt;
Run these queries:&lt;br /&gt;
-          To find the SMP_Item QB UID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select UID, Name, InventoryID From Inventory Where Name Like &amp;#039;SMP_Item%&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
-          Put the QB Item InventoryID in the Where and run the query.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Disable Trigger All on Inventory;&lt;br /&gt;
Update Inventory Set         QBExport = &amp;#039;false&amp;#039;, QBInventory = &amp;#039;false&amp;#039;, QBModified = NULL, QBItem = &amp;#039;false&amp;#039;, InventoryID = &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Where Name Not Like &amp;#039;SMP_Item%&amp;#039;;  ---  or whatever your default item is named&lt;br /&gt;
Enable Trigger All on Inventory;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Recurring_Order&amp;diff=6264</id>
		<title>Recurring Order</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Recurring_Order&amp;diff=6264"/>
		<updated>2017-03-27T17:13:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: Redirected page to Recurring Orders&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#Redirect [[Recurring Orders]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=System_Requirements&amp;diff=6263</id>
		<title>System Requirements</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=System_Requirements&amp;diff=6263"/>
		<updated>2017-03-24T15:22:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: /* System Requirements for Mobile SME Products */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Client &amp;amp; Server System Requirements for SME==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SME Technical Specifications:==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===SME and system requirements for Client Machine===&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum CPU required: 800 MHz minimum (Get a good mid-range size and use that)&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum memory required: 2GB - 4GB recommended&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum free hard disk space required: 300 MB, 1 GB recommended&lt;br /&gt;
*Operating system version: Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum screen resolution: 1024 x 768&lt;br /&gt;
*Network:  10MHz minimum, 100MHz or higher recommended&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===SME minimum system requirements for Server===&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum CPU required: 1.5 GHz, 2 or more GHz recommended.&lt;br /&gt;
*Memory/RAM: Ram requirement is a factor of the database size. Plan on 1 gig per gig of database size plus 2-gig minimum for operating system use. &lt;br /&gt;
**Go to this article for details for improving [[SQL Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
**MS SQL should not be installed on a domain controller due to security considerations and domain controller default SQL databases&lt;br /&gt;
**MS SQL version should be matched to server operating system 2008 – SQL 2008 R2, 2012 – SQL 2012 R2&lt;br /&gt;
**Server should have a separate drive for SQL Temp database usage as this database is written to often in high volume operations&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum free hard disk space required: 4 GB minimum, 10 GB preferred&lt;br /&gt;
**Servers should be using a Raid 10 configuration with a separate drive for log files and temp database usage&lt;br /&gt;
**A separate partition can suffice if another drive is not available &lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum screen resolution: 1024 x 768 – SME is optimized for 1280 x 1200 &lt;br /&gt;
*Network: 10Mbps min, 100Mbps or 1Gbps recommended.&lt;br /&gt;
*Operating System: Vista/Win 7/Win 8/Win 8.1, or Windows Server 2008 STD R2/2011 STD, 2012 R2 STD, SQL 2014 – not approved yet:&lt;br /&gt;
**MS Does not recommend installing MS SQL Server on a domain controller or SBS operating system. We also do not recommend installing on a server running MS Exchange Server. &lt;br /&gt;
*Database: MS SQL Server 2008, 2012 any edition.&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: The Express Edition is free and has no user limit, but does have a limit of 10GB for 2008 and 2012. This is sufficient size for most companies unless you plan utilizing stored documents. High5 suggests using a separate SQL instance for SME. We can share a SQL instance however certain maintenance tasks may take the other databases off-line while performing the maintenance &lt;br /&gt;
**Express version are limited in memory usage, Database size, processor cores, and in basic optimization functions&lt;br /&gt;
*SQL Server 2005 – no longer supported&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==System Requirements for Mobile SME Products==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[SME Mobile Prerequisites]] for system requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Mobile SME products include Mobile Tech for SME, TimeTracker for SME, Dispatch Plus, Warehouse Manager, Customer Portal and others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quickbooks==&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
*High5 Service Management Enterprise, (SME), is compatible with all yearly upgrades to Pro, Premier, and Enterprise versions of QuickBooks. The SQLink program will function without issue as long as the following steps are taken. [[Quickbook Instructions]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=System_Requirements&amp;diff=6262</id>
		<title>System Requirements</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=System_Requirements&amp;diff=6262"/>
		<updated>2017-03-24T15:22:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Client &amp;amp; Server System Requirements for SME==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SME Technical Specifications:==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===SME and system requirements for Client Machine===&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum CPU required: 800 MHz minimum (Get a good mid-range size and use that)&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum memory required: 2GB - 4GB recommended&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum free hard disk space required: 300 MB, 1 GB recommended&lt;br /&gt;
*Operating system version: Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum screen resolution: 1024 x 768&lt;br /&gt;
*Network:  10MHz minimum, 100MHz or higher recommended&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===SME minimum system requirements for Server===&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum CPU required: 1.5 GHz, 2 or more GHz recommended.&lt;br /&gt;
*Memory/RAM: Ram requirement is a factor of the database size. Plan on 1 gig per gig of database size plus 2-gig minimum for operating system use. &lt;br /&gt;
**Go to this article for details for improving [[SQL Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
**MS SQL should not be installed on a domain controller due to security considerations and domain controller default SQL databases&lt;br /&gt;
**MS SQL version should be matched to server operating system 2008 – SQL 2008 R2, 2012 – SQL 2012 R2&lt;br /&gt;
**Server should have a separate drive for SQL Temp database usage as this database is written to often in high volume operations&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum free hard disk space required: 4 GB minimum, 10 GB preferred&lt;br /&gt;
**Servers should be using a Raid 10 configuration with a separate drive for log files and temp database usage&lt;br /&gt;
**A separate partition can suffice if another drive is not available &lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum screen resolution: 1024 x 768 – SME is optimized for 1280 x 1200 &lt;br /&gt;
*Network: 10Mbps min, 100Mbps or 1Gbps recommended.&lt;br /&gt;
*Operating System: Vista/Win 7/Win 8/Win 8.1, or Windows Server 2008 STD R2/2011 STD, 2012 R2 STD, SQL 2014 – not approved yet:&lt;br /&gt;
**MS Does not recommend installing MS SQL Server on a domain controller or SBS operating system. We also do not recommend installing on a server running MS Exchange Server. &lt;br /&gt;
*Database: MS SQL Server 2008, 2012 any edition.&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: The Express Edition is free and has no user limit, but does have a limit of 10GB for 2008 and 2012. This is sufficient size for most companies unless you plan utilizing stored documents. High5 suggests using a separate SQL instance for SME. We can share a SQL instance however certain maintenance tasks may take the other databases off-line while performing the maintenance &lt;br /&gt;
**Express version are limited in memory usage, Database size, processor cores, and in basic optimization functions&lt;br /&gt;
*SQL Server 2005 – no longer supported&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==System Requirements for Mobile SME Products==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[SME Mobile Prerequisites]] for system requirements&lt;br /&gt;
Mobile SME products include Mobile Tech for SME, TimeTracker for SME, Dispatch Plus, Warehouse Manager, Customer Portal and others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quickbooks==&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
*High5 Service Management Enterprise, (SME), is compatible with all yearly upgrades to Pro, Premier, and Enterprise versions of QuickBooks. The SQLink program will function without issue as long as the following steps are taken. [[Quickbook Instructions]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=System_Requirements&amp;diff=6261</id>
		<title>System Requirements</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=System_Requirements&amp;diff=6261"/>
		<updated>2017-03-24T15:20:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Client &amp;amp; Server System Requirements for SME==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SME Technical Specifications:==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===SME and system requirements for Client Machine===&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum CPU required: 800 MHz minimum (Get a good mid-range size and use that)&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum memory required: 2GB - 4GB recommended&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum free hard disk space required: 300 MB, 1 GB recommended&lt;br /&gt;
*Operating system version: Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum screen resolution: 1024 x 768&lt;br /&gt;
*Network:  10MHz minimum, 100MHz or higher recommended&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===SME minimum system requirements for Server===&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum CPU required: 1.5 GHz, 2 or more GHz recommended.&lt;br /&gt;
*Memory/RAM: Ram requirement is a factor of the database size. Plan on 1 gig per gig of database size plus 2-gig minimum for operating system use. &lt;br /&gt;
**Go to this article for details for improving [[SQL Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
**MS SQL should not be installed on a domain controller due to security considerations and domain controller default SQL databases&lt;br /&gt;
**MS SQL version should be matched to server operating system 2008 – SQL 2008 R2, 2012 – SQL 2012 R2&lt;br /&gt;
**Server should have a separate drive for SQL Temp database usage as this database is written to often in high volume operations&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum free hard disk space required: 4 GB minimum, 10 GB preferred&lt;br /&gt;
**Servers should be using a Raid 10 configuration with a separate drive for log files and temp database usage&lt;br /&gt;
**A separate partition can suffice if another drive is not available &lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum screen resolution: 1024 x 768 – SME is optimized for 1280 x 1200 &lt;br /&gt;
*Network: 10Mbps min, 100Mbps or 1Gbps recommended.&lt;br /&gt;
*Operating System: Vista/Win 7/Win 8/Win 8.1, or Windows Server 2008 STD R2/2011 STD, 2012 R2 STD, SQL 2014 – not approved yet:&lt;br /&gt;
**MS Does not recommend installing MS SQL Server on a domain controller or SBS operating system. We also do not recommend installing on a server running MS Exchange Server. &lt;br /&gt;
*Database: MS SQL Server 2008, 2012 any edition.&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: The Express Edition is free and has no user limit, but does have a limit of 10GB for 2008 and 2012. This is sufficient size for most companies unless you plan utilizing stored documents. High5 suggests using a separate SQL instance for SME. We can share a SQL instance however certain maintenance tasks may take the other databases off-line while performing the maintenance &lt;br /&gt;
**Express version are limited in memory usage, Database size, processor cores, and in basic optimization functions&lt;br /&gt;
*SQL Server 2005 – no longer supported&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==System Requirements for Mobile SME Products==&lt;br /&gt;
Mobile SME products include Mobile Tech for SME, TimeTracker for SME, Dispatch Plus, Warehouse Manager, Customer Portal and others.&lt;br /&gt;
* Port 215 mut be open on the router to support incoming traffic flow for the mobile products&lt;br /&gt;
* IIS, Microsoft Internet Information Services, runs on the network and has minimum requirements as indicated on Microsoft site.  Specifically, IIS requires the server to have sufficient disk space and memory availability on the server it&amp;#039;s running on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quickbooks==&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
*High5 Service Management Enterprise, (SME), is compatible with all yearly upgrades to Pro, Premier, and Enterprise versions of QuickBooks. The SQLink program will function without issue as long as the following steps are taken. [[Quickbook Instructions]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=System_Requirements&amp;diff=6260</id>
		<title>System Requirements</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=System_Requirements&amp;diff=6260"/>
		<updated>2017-03-24T15:20:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Client &amp;amp; Server System Requirements for SME==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SME Technical Specifications:==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===SME and system requirements for Client Machine===&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum CPU required: 800 MHz minimum (Get a good mid-range size and use that)&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum memory required: 2GB - 4GB recommended&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum free hard disk space required: 300 MB, 1 GB recommended&lt;br /&gt;
*Operating system version: Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum screen resolution: 1024 x 768&lt;br /&gt;
*Network:  10MHz minimum, 100MHz or higher recommended&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===SME minimum system requirements for Server===&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum CPU required: 1.5 GHz, 2 or more GHz recommended.&lt;br /&gt;
*Memory/RAM: Ram requirement is a factor of the database size. Plan on 1 gig per gig of database size plus 2-gig minimum for operating system use. &lt;br /&gt;
**Go to this article for details for improving [[SQL Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
**MS SQL should not be installed on a domain controller due to security considerations and domain controller default SQL databases&lt;br /&gt;
**MS SQL version should be matched to server operating system 2008 – SQL 2008 R2, 2012 – SQL 2012 R2&lt;br /&gt;
**Server should have a separate drive for SQL Temp database usage as this database is written to often in high volume operations&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum free hard disk space required: 4 GB minimum, 10 GB preferred&lt;br /&gt;
**Servers should be using a Raid 10 configuration with a separate drive for log files and temp database usage&lt;br /&gt;
**A separate partition can suffice if another drive is not available &lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum screen resolution: 1024 x 768 – SME is optimized for 1280 x 1200 &lt;br /&gt;
*Network: 10Mbps min, 100Mbps or 1Gbps recommended.&lt;br /&gt;
*Operating System: Vista/Win 7/Win 8/Win 8.1, or Windows Server 2008 STD R2/2011 STD, 2012 R2 STD, SQL 2014 – not approved yet:&lt;br /&gt;
**MS Does not recommend installing MS SQL Server on a domain controller or SBS operating system. We also do not recommend installing on a server running MS Exchange Server. &lt;br /&gt;
*Database: MS SQL Server 2008, 2012 any edition.&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: The Express Edition is free and has no user limit, but does have a limit of 10GB for 2008 and 2012. This is sufficient size for most companies unless you plan utilizing stored documents. High5 suggests using a separate SQL instance for SME. We can share a SQL instance however certain maintenance tasks may take the other databases off-line while performing the maintenance &lt;br /&gt;
**Express version are limited in memory usage, Database size, processor cores, and in basic optimization functions&lt;br /&gt;
*SQL Server 2005 – no longer supported&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System Requirements for Mobile SME Products===&lt;br /&gt;
Mobile SME products include Mobile Tech for SME, TimeTracker for SME, Dispatch Plus, Warehouse Manager, Customer Portal and others.&lt;br /&gt;
* Port 215 mut be open on the router to support incoming traffic flow for the mobile products&lt;br /&gt;
* IIS, Microsoft Internet Information Services, runs on the network and has minimum requirements as indicated on Microsoft site.  Specifically, IIS requires the server to have sufficient disk space and memory availability on the server it&amp;#039;s running on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Quickbooks===&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
*High5 Service Management Enterprise, (SME), is compatible with all yearly upgrades to Pro, Premier, and Enterprise versions of QuickBooks. The SQLink program will function without issue as long as the following steps are taken. [[Quickbook Instructions]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=System_Requirements&amp;diff=6259</id>
		<title>System Requirements</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=System_Requirements&amp;diff=6259"/>
		<updated>2017-03-24T15:19:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;##Client &amp;amp; Server System Requirements for SME##&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
##SME Technical Specifications:##&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
###SME and system requirements for Client Machine###&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum CPU required: 800 MHz minimum (Get a good mid-range size and use that)&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum memory required: 2GB - 4GB recommended&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum free hard disk space required: 300 MB, 1 GB recommended&lt;br /&gt;
*Operating system version: Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum screen resolution: 1024 x 768&lt;br /&gt;
*Network:  10MHz minimum, 100MHz or higher recommended&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
###SME minimum system requirements for Server###&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum CPU required: 1.5 GHz, 2 or more GHz recommended.&lt;br /&gt;
*Memory/RAM: Ram requirement is a factor of the database size. Plan on 1 gig per gig of database size plus 2-gig minimum for operating system use. &lt;br /&gt;
**Go to this article for details for improving [[SQL Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
**MS SQL should not be installed on a domain controller due to security considerations and domain controller default SQL databases&lt;br /&gt;
**MS SQL version should be matched to server operating system 2008 – SQL 2008 R2, 2012 – SQL 2012 R2&lt;br /&gt;
**Server should have a separate drive for SQL Temp database usage as this database is written to often in high volume operations&lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum free hard disk space required: 4 GB minimum, 10 GB preferred&lt;br /&gt;
**Servers should be using a Raid 10 configuration with a separate drive for log files and temp database usage&lt;br /&gt;
**A separate partition can suffice if another drive is not available &lt;br /&gt;
*Minimum screen resolution: 1024 x 768 – SME is optimized for 1280 x 1200 &lt;br /&gt;
*Network: 10Mbps min, 100Mbps or 1Gbps recommended.&lt;br /&gt;
*Operating System: Vista/Win 7/Win 8/Win 8.1, or Windows Server 2008 STD R2/2011 STD, 2012 R2 STD, SQL 2014 – not approved yet:&lt;br /&gt;
**MS Does not recommend installing MS SQL Server on a domain controller or SBS operating system. We also do not recommend installing on a server running MS Exchange Server. &lt;br /&gt;
*Database: MS SQL Server 2008, 2012 any edition.&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: The Express Edition is free and has no user limit, but does have a limit of 10GB for 2008 and 2012. This is sufficient size for most companies unless you plan utilizing stored documents. High5 suggests using a separate SQL instance for SME. We can share a SQL instance however certain maintenance tasks may take the other databases off-line while performing the maintenance &lt;br /&gt;
**Express version are limited in memory usage, Database size, processor cores, and in basic optimization functions&lt;br /&gt;
*SQL Server 2005 – no longer supported&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
##System Requirements for Mobile SME Products##&lt;br /&gt;
Mobile SME products include Mobile Tech for SME, TimeTracker for SME, Dispatch Plus, Warehouse Manager, Customer Portal and others.&lt;br /&gt;
* Port 215 mut be open on the router to support incoming traffic flow for the mobile products&lt;br /&gt;
* IIS, Microsoft Internet Information Services, runs on the network and has minimum requirements as indicated on Microsoft site.  Specifically, IIS requires the server to have sufficient disk space and memory availability on the server it&amp;#039;s running on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
##Quickbooks##&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
*High5 Service Management Enterprise, (SME), is compatible with all yearly upgrades to Pro, Premier, and Enterprise versions of QuickBooks. The SQLink program will function without issue as long as the following steps are taken. [[Quickbook Instructions]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink&amp;diff=6258</id>
		<title>SQLink</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink&amp;diff=6258"/>
		<updated>2017-03-15T21:59:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: /* Initial Setup for SQLink */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;SME to  QuickBooks  Link Synchronization Tool&lt;br /&gt;
Definitions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) QB: QuickBooks® by Intuit®&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) SME: Service Management Enterprise by High 5 Software™&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) SQLink: SME to QB synchronization program by High 5 Software™&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SQLink for QuickBooks is a robust syncing engine linking SME and QuickBooks information. The sync process encompasses four programs:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*SME – Service Management Enterprise&lt;br /&gt;
*SQLink – SME to QuickBooks Import- Export data engine.&lt;br /&gt;
*QuickBooks by Intuit – Service Management Enterprise (SME) is compatible with all released versions of QuickBooks, Pro, Premier, Enterprise, regardless of year. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Review the following link regarding Intuit Sunset policies:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;http://support.quickbooks.intuit.com/support/pages/knowledgebasearticle/1003113&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*QBFC – QuickBooks File Connector XML parsing engine. Runs behind the scenes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following information covers SME to QuickBooks Sync Points, SQLink Initial Setup, and a module list covering setup, optional settings, and troubleshooting common errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support Versions of QuickBooks ==&lt;br /&gt;
Service Management Enterprise (SME) is compatible with all released versions of QuickBooks, Pro, Premier, Enterprise, regardless of year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Intuit may discontinue support for QuickBooks editions older than three years. SME and SQLink can connect to these unsupported versions of QuickBooks, but if there are issues connecting High 5 will not assist with problem resolution. Click here  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;http://support.quickbooks.intuit.com/support/pages/knowledgebasearticle/1003113&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to view the QuickBooks Service Discontinuation Plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When upgrading QuickBooks to another supported version listed above, you don&amp;#039;t need to do anything with SME and SQLink as long as your QuickBooks company file remains in place on the server/server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Intuit maintains backward compatibility when upgrading to new versions of QuickBooks. Generally there has not been any issue upgrading. Most of our customers upgrade and then call to see if it’s still compatible. Note: new features added to QB will not be implemented in SQLink until we’ve decided or have a customer request to integrate the updates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sync Points for SME and QuickBooks ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following table lists the synchronization points between SME and QuickBooks modules. Refer to the SQLink for QuickBooks wiki pages for detailed syncing information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 98pt; height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;130&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Accounts&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Synced for use of assigning accounts for item syncing only.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Business Types&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Full sync - Customer Types in QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Class Tracking&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Full sync of class tracking on all modules. Class can be assigned to Customer, Order, Item, etc..&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;36&amp;quot; | Credit Memos&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Synced from QuickBooks . (Need to be applied to an invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;36&amp;quot; | Customer Balances&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Calculated from QuickBooks invoices. A payment or credit must be associated with an invoice to be considered for a balance in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Customers&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Full two-way sync. Customers can be added or modified in either SME or QuickBooks .  Billing/Parent customers for Jobs/Sites should only be updated in QuickBooks due to the possibility of issues with existing history for the job/site.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Employees&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Sync to SME as technicians and users table. Employees are initially setup in QuickBooks due to sensitive information that is only maintained in QuickBooks .&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Inventory Assemblies&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Do not sync.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Inventory Groups&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | SME Packages = QuickBooks Inventory Groups. Inventory Assemblies do not sync.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;36&amp;quot; | Invoices from SME&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Invoices in SME fully transfer to QuickBooks. Invoices from the QB QuickBooks invoice transfer to SME for balance purposes, no detailed items are transferred on QB Invoices. (QuickBooks invoices cannot be edited in SME.)  SME invoices should be edited in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Items in QB&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Full sync of inventory, non-inventory, service, wage, and discount items. See the &amp;quot;Export Options for Inventory Items&amp;quot; section of the [[Default Export to QuickBooks Settings]] page for more information syncing inventory items.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Items in SME&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Option to sync with QuickBooks or not. If not synced with QuickBooks inventory will use a generic default item to transfer accounting information for invoicing and purchase orders.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;36&amp;quot; | Payments&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Can enter payments in QuickBooks for SME invoices. Payments can also be applied in QuickBooks for SME invoices. QuickBooks invoices can only be paid in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | PO Bill&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; |  Syncs with QuickBooks when items are received. (Partial receipt increments the Bill # in QuickBooks ). Go to the &amp;quot;Export Options for Purchase Orders&amp;quot; section on the [[Default Export to QuickBooks Settings]] page for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Proposals&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Import from QuickBooks and Export from SME. You cannot export a QB proposal back to QB from SME.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;36&amp;quot; | Purchase Orders&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Optional sync with QuickBooks . Multiple syncing options.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Subcontractor Bills&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Subcontractors used on orders in SME can create a Bill in QuickBooks. Go to the &amp;quot;Export Options for Subcontractors&amp;quot; section on the [[Default Export to QuickBooks Settings]] page for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Subcontractor PO&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Subcontractors used on orders in SME can create a Purchase Order in QuickBooks .&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Subcontractors&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Sync of 1099 vendors as Subcontractors in SME. Vendors that are Subcontractors are initially setup in QuickBooks due to sensitive information that is only maintained in QuickBooks .&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;36&amp;quot; | Tax Codes and Groups&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Controlled by QuickBooks. Enter new tax codes in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;36&amp;quot; | Terms&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Controlled by QuickBooks. Enter new terms in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Vendors&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Full sync between SME and QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Wage Items&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Synced from QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Weekly Timesheet&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | SME labor item records sync with QuickBooks weekly time sheet. Customer name and job number are transferred. Time sheets must be turned on in QuickBooks to use this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Initial Setup for SQLink ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
SQLink is an add-on product to SME to synchronize SME and QB databases. For a complete list of the &lt;br /&gt;
synchronization points review the Sync Points for SQLink page.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
SME handles sales, customers, service orders, and inventory while  QuickBooks handles the accounting, payroll, and banking integration.  SME and QB together make a very powerful combination for managing your service business.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;READ OVER THIS DOCUMENT CAREFULLY.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
It is very critical that the interface between SME and  QuickBooks is established properly for your business. The SQLink Wizard will fill in the necessary values as defaults. It is recommended that these values remain in place unless they conflict with your business operations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your initial synchronization must take place on the computer hosting the SME database! Please plan for a time when you can complete the process without interruption from other system demands. If on a networked system install the programs on your server. If you do not have a server, designate a system to host the database, and install the programs on that system.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SME/SQLink, and QuickBooks&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; must already be installed on the computer where you will run SQLink. If either of these programs is NOT installed, you must install the missing programs. SQLink installs with SME in the SME program folder.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Important&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  QuickBooks must be updated before performing the initial sync! This may mean that you will have to perform the  QuickBooks update on all other computers where  QuickBooks has been installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SME and QuickBooks:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Must have company data filled in. If both SME and QuickBooks are installed and the QuickBooks company file has data, please proceed with these instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Suggestion:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; It is recommended to start with copies, (sandbox copies) of SME and  QuickBooks, rather than your live data until you get the synchronization settings established the way you need to match your business processes. Once all settings are correct and information is passing between the applications to your satisfaction you can setup a live sync with a fresh empty SME database.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Advised:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; To avoid possible data issues it is advised you run the  QuickBooks Verify and Backup utility prior to setting up SQLink and SME.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of initial synchronizations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#To an SME install with no prior data importing the  QuickBooks data. (Referred to as an initial sync.)&lt;br /&gt;
#To an SME installation that has been used for running your business and a QuickBooks file that has also been used to run your business without synchronization. (An in place sync.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your installation falls under number 2 please contact High5Software prior to performing the initial sync as care must be taken to clean up data that may cause issues when syncing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Initial sync to a newly installed SME application:===&lt;br /&gt;
SQLink will install with SME in the SME program folder.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#SQLink will locate your open QuickBooks file.&lt;br /&gt;
#QuickBooks will open the Access Confirmation dialogue shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
#Note: on some versions of QuickBooks this will happen again at a later stage in the setup process.&lt;br /&gt;
#You will see the following screen in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
#[[File:QB1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on ‘Yes’, always allow access even if QuickBooks is not running.&lt;br /&gt;
#Login as “Admin” (Note: Admin is the level required for SQLink to accesses QB. It is not the level users of SQLink access QB.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the “Allow this application to access personal data…” This will allow transfer of technician information to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
#Your settings should be as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QB2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10. Click “Continue”.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11.You may get a certification warning. Click &amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039; on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12.[[File:QB3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13.You will see the following QuickBooks screen:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:QB4.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14.Click “Done”.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;15.SQLink will now be listed in the Integrated Applications List in QuicBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Set Up For Initial QuickBooks Company=== &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#SQLink will open with the Set up for Initial Company window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.[[File:SetupForInitialCompany_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.The following set up options require attention:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.Database name (Select Existing) field. Copy the database name from this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.Company Name (Select Existing or Enter New) field. Paste the database name into this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.QuickBooks Company File Location: Click the ellipse in the QuickBooks Company File location and browse to the location of your company file.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.Note: You can obtain the QuickBooks Company file location by going to QuickBooks and pressing the ‘F2’ key. This will open the Product Information screen. The company file location is in the File Information block:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.[[File:QB6.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.The paths must match exactly!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; On Vista and Newer operating systems you will be required to close QuickBooks before you can set the path. This is also true of Windows Server 2008.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11.Enter your  Area Code&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12.Select your Country. (Default is US.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13.Enter your email address if you want error logs emailed&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14.Select your QuickBooks year&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;15.Click ‘Ok’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;16.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; On some operating systems you may need to repeat the above steps 2 times before QuickBooks will register the company file path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===SQLink - Initial Setup===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer to the following steps to set SQLink options and complete the initial sync. Options and settings for the Initial Setup can also be configured after the initial sync. For detailed information on the implications of specific settings refer to the appropriate Wiki page.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
On Import:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; On import settings cover SQLink functionality when importing information from QuickBooks for Invoices and Payments, Inactive Customers, Next Invoice Number, and Billing Name Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SQLinkInitialSetup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Merge unmatched invoices and payments:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check this box to match QuickBooks invoices and payments. Leaving it unchecked will not import payment information from QuickBooks. (The usual setting is checked)&lt;br /&gt;
#    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Skip inactive customers on import/export:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Checking this box will keep SQLink from importing or exporting inactive customers. Since both SME and QuickBooks are programmed to work with inactive customers it is recommended that you do not check this option. (Usual status is Unchecked)&lt;br /&gt;
#    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing Name Options:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Default setting is Billing Name = Customer Name. For more info on this topic review [[#SQLink Billing Name Options|SQLink Billing Name Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
#   &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; On Export:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; On Export settings cover Tech Time and Purchase Order options.&lt;br /&gt;
#   &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Include SMP items on Purchase Order:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This option will pass the default SQLink item for that actual item used in QuickBooks if the item does not exist in QuickBooks. (Usual setting is Checked)&lt;br /&gt;
#  Export all uninitialized customers&lt;br /&gt;
#  User general ledger entries for Default Material items:  If you have SME handling all inventory, set this flag to keep QB inventory accounts up to date with GL or journal entries.&lt;br /&gt;
# Transfer Tech Time:  Used to transfer time entries from Time Tracker for SME or Time In/Out from Mobile tech.&lt;br /&gt;
## Replace Tech time records on change:  This will delete and recreate time entries in QB if they change in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
## Actual Time Only:  Set this to only send time tracking (task detail) records.  If unchecked will send scheduled time instead of actual time.&lt;br /&gt;
## Required time Sheet Status:  Set one of the options on when you want time sheet entries to send to QB, either manually, when submitted in Time Tracker for SME or when approved or when marked as &amp;quot;paid&amp;quot; from the Payroll tab of time tracker, or Alway export will send immediately when entered.  &lt;br /&gt;
### Recommend to set this to Approved if you are having someone approve time entries or set to &amp;quot;Submitted&amp;quot; if no one will be approving time.&lt;br /&gt;
## Update to Payrolled after export:  Check if you want the time entries to be marked as paid.  Thus, when techs look at Time Tracker they will see the time under paid section in the weekly summary.&lt;br /&gt;
# Subcontractor TimeSheets on PO:  Send subcontractor time to a PO&lt;br /&gt;
# Subcontractor TimeSheets on Bills:  Send subcontractor time to a Bill&lt;br /&gt;
#   &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Purchase Order Options.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#    Do Not Export Purchase Orders or Bills&lt;br /&gt;
#    Export Purchase Orders Only – Bills will not export&lt;br /&gt;
#    Export Purchase Orders &amp;amp; Bills&lt;br /&gt;
#   &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Export Bills Only:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Since Purchase Orders require further action to tie them to Bills in QuickBooks the Bill is the method of inventory adjustment in QuickBooks. (This is the recommended setting.)&lt;br /&gt;
# Initialize PO Bill date from Received item:  Set QB bill to the date received rather than date the PO was created in SME.  This is recommended to check for proper payment terms with your vendors.&lt;br /&gt;
# Initialize by PO Item&lt;br /&gt;
#Make your selections based on the above information and click ‘Next’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#SQLink will import the following QuickBooks items:&lt;br /&gt;
#    Pay Methods&lt;br /&gt;
#    Sales Tax Codes&lt;br /&gt;
#    Terms&lt;br /&gt;
#    Classes&lt;br /&gt;
#    Sales Reps&lt;br /&gt;
#    Tax Code Groups&lt;br /&gt;
#    Accounts&lt;br /&gt;
#    Pay Items&lt;br /&gt;
#    Discount Items&lt;br /&gt;
#    Wage Items&lt;br /&gt;
#    Employee List&lt;br /&gt;
#    Vendor List&lt;br /&gt;
#    Inventory List&lt;br /&gt;
#    Non-Inventory List&lt;br /&gt;
#    Service List&lt;br /&gt;
#    Other Charges List&lt;br /&gt;
#    Inventory Groups&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Initial Setup: Invoice/Proposal Options===&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Options: Options on this screen determine how invoices export from SME to QuickBooks. These options can be changed after the initial import.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SQLinkInitialSetup2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#   Invoice Line Items – determines what shows on the invoice for Labor, Material, and Services. These items are ‘default’ items and will be passed on the invoice should an item that is only in SME, and not in QuickBooks, be used on an invoice. (Default settings are to Show Labor, Materials, and Service.)&lt;br /&gt;
#    Line Item Order: Determines the order of information as it is exported to QuickBooks. (Usual setting is to keep Detail Order.)&lt;br /&gt;
#    Other Options:&lt;br /&gt;
#    Show Services Requested. (Usual option is to Not show Services Requested.)&lt;br /&gt;
#    Show Services Preformed On Invoice. Usual option is To show Services Preformed.)&lt;br /&gt;
#    Export Purchase Orders for Subcontractors:&lt;br /&gt;
#    Use Invoice Reference Number:&lt;br /&gt;
#    Export Bills for Subcontractors&lt;br /&gt;
#    Use Invoice Reference Number&lt;br /&gt;
#    Mark Invoice as ‘To Be Printed’ in QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
#    Use ticket number for QuickBooks P.O. Number&lt;br /&gt;
#    Show Technician Name in Labor Line Item&lt;br /&gt;
#    Service Location:&lt;br /&gt;
#    Show at Top&lt;br /&gt;
#    Show with Charges&lt;br /&gt;
#    Show at Bottom&lt;br /&gt;
#    Service Location:&lt;br /&gt;
#    Make your selections and press ‘Next’&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Initial Setup - Payment and Charge Buckets===&lt;br /&gt;
Options on this screen determine which accounts SQLink will use for the following items. You do not need to select any settings at this time as these will be filled in by the SQLink initial setup wizard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InitialSetup_PaymentAndChargeBuckets.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Charge Buckets&lt;br /&gt;
#    Travel Charges Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#    Premium Charges Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#    Other Charges Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#    Freight Charges Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#    Excise Charges Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#    Late Fees Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#    Credit Buckets&lt;br /&gt;
#    Prepaid Used Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#    Discount Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#    Credit Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#   Refunds Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click ‘Next’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Initial Setup - Classes &amp;amp; Miscellaneous===&lt;br /&gt;
Options on this screen determine how default classes, time tracking accounts, wage item, and other accounts will pass information. This information will be filled in automatically when the wizard completes the import process.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ClassesAndMisc.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Classes&lt;br /&gt;
#    Labor Class&lt;br /&gt;
#    Material Class&lt;br /&gt;
#    Services Class&lt;br /&gt;
#    Miscellaneous Accounts&lt;br /&gt;
#    Time Tracking Service Item&lt;br /&gt;
#    SMP Tax Code&lt;br /&gt;
#    Wage Items&lt;br /&gt;
#    Default Pay Wage Item&lt;br /&gt;
#    Accounts&lt;br /&gt;
#    Default Payment Receivable Account&lt;br /&gt;
#    Default Payment Deposit Account&lt;br /&gt;
#    Default Inventory Asset Account&lt;br /&gt;
#    Default COGS Account&lt;br /&gt;
#    Default Service Expense Account&lt;br /&gt;
#    Default Sales Income Account&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click ‘Finish’: SQLink will create SQLink default items named SMP_&amp;lt;Item name&amp;gt; in QuickBooks and then complete the importing process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: The time required to process an initial import will depend on 2 factors:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.    Number of items in QuickBooks – Customer List, Item List, &amp;amp; Invoice/Payment list. Company files with a lot of information can take hours to process the initial import. Be prepared for this eventuality when starting the syncing process.&lt;br /&gt;
2.    System resources available to QuickBooks during the sync. If you are running the sync on a system with marginal memory or one that is short on disk space there will be a significant impact on the time required to process the initial sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===SQLink will complete the following tasks:===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Creating Default Values&lt;br /&gt;
#    Retrieving Tax Codes&lt;br /&gt;
#    Creating SMP_tax item&lt;br /&gt;
#    Retrieving QuickBooks Customers&lt;br /&gt;
#    Retrieving Invoices and payments&lt;br /&gt;
#    When the import is complete SQLink will return to the initial Setup tab; Import/Export Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===SQLink Setup Screens Post Import:===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Import/Export Options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SQLink_Import-ExportOptionsTab.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SQLink_Invoice-ProposalOptions.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Payments and Credits:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SQLink_PaymentsAndCreditsTab.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classes and Accounts Options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SQLink_ClassesAndAccountsOptions.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Initial Sync is complete. Close all programs, SME, SQLink, and QuickBooks, and reopen them to process the first regular sync.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: This sync can also take a considerable length of time since status flags are initialized on all imported items. QuickBooks is not required to be in ‘Single User’/Admin mode for this sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink - QuickBooks Name Length Limitations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following list outlines QuickBooks field name length limits. In general SME will allow longer names than QuickBooks. If you make a field entry longer than that allowed by QuicBooks SQLink will return an error.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Field&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QuickBooks&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Site Name&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;80&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Account Number&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;20&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;20&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Site Address 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Site Address 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Site City&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;20&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;30&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Bill Address 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Bill Address 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Bill City&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;20&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;30&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Mail Name&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Mail Address 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Mail Address 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Mail Address 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;20&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;30&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Item Description&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;4,095&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;4,095&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Memo&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;4,095&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;4,095&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Note Field&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;4,095&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;4,095&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Address 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;60&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Address 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tech&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Tech Name&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Tech Address 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Tech Address 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;30&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;30&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tax Code&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;45&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;30&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tax Group&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;45&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;30&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Package&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;40&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;30&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Syncing SME with a new QuickBooks file ==&lt;br /&gt;
See link for creating a company file in Quickbooks Desktop: &lt;br /&gt;
https://community.intuit.com/questions/1260395-create-a-new-company-file-in-quickbooks-desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A new QuickBooks company file must have the following info before syncing to SME:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;gt; Preferences&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Accounting preferences&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Inventory – Inventory &amp;amp; Purchase orders are active (Even if SME will hold all inventory)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Payroll &amp;amp; Employees – If transferring SME labor to Time Sheets in QB&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*  Sales Tax – Yes – Most Common Sales Tax Item will come from SME after the sync&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Time Tracking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;gt; General&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Chart of Accounts&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Sales Tax Code list – Enter Tax &amp;amp; Non Tax&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Item Lists&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Tax Codes and Groups set up in Item Lists&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;gt; Customer &amp;amp; Vendor Profile Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Class List&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Terms List&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Payment Method List&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Customer Type list if used&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Employees&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Enter with full addresses&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Payroll and Compensation Info&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Enter Wage items – if using time sheets&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setting up SQLink on a new computer ==&lt;br /&gt;
How many desktops can have SQLink syncing with QuickBooks? As many as you want, but it can only be run on one machine at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You will need to setup SQLink on additional machines by following these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Step 1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: Setup the SQLink Shortcut on the additional users desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;SQLink-QB-FilePath: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-Go to the users desktop and right click on the SME icon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Open File Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; (or you can browse to the SME folder if you know the path)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:OpenFileLocation.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SQLink&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Application&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sqlink5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Right click on the SQLink Application and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Create Shortcut&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Send to Desktop as Shortcut&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, depending on what Windows you are on. If you created the shortcut, drag the shortcut to your desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SQLink_CreateShortcut.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Step 2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: Download and run the QBFC Installer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click this link to download and run the QBFC Installer. You won&amp;#039;t be able to open SQLink until you run this.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;http://high5software.com/downloads/QB/QBFC11_0Installer.exe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Step 3&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: Check your QuickBooks Path to make sure it matches what is setup in SQLink&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;One other item that can prevent a successful sync is that SQLink and QuickBooks must reference the same path to access the QuickBooks company file.  It is recommended that you make sure all users that will be running SQLink use the same path in QuickBooks to access the QuickBooks company file.  Typically a UNC path is used for QB access to the company file when multiple users will be running the sync. An alternative is to map a drive to the QB company file location, typically ‘Q’, and make sure all QuickBooks users log into the company file with the mapped drive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To check this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Open QuickBooks and press &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;F2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- In the window that opens location the File Information section. Note the path in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:QuickBooks_FileInformation_Location.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Open SQLink and click to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Look at the Quick Books Company File field  (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:QBLink_Companyfile.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- The path in the two field need to be the same in order for the sync to work. If they are the same, you can click Cancel in SQLink. If they are not the same, you will need to either open QuickBooks using the path set up in SQLink, or change the location in SQLink. Note that if you change the path in SQLink, then another user at your company may have to change the path they open QuickBooks with.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The place where this usually goes astray is that on client machines QuickBooks is accessed through a mapped drive and on the server it is accessed through a local drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink Full Sync ==&lt;br /&gt;
SQLink is an add-on product to SME5 to synchronize SME and QB databases. SME handles sales, customers, service orders, and inventory while QuickBooks .  handles the accounting, payroll, and banking integration. SME and QB together make a very powerful combination for managing your service business.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
This Guide explains the regular sync activity between SME and QB. The sync can be done at any time. Most customers run the sync at the beginning or end of the day, however it can be run whenever needed.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
For this guide, the initial sync between SME and QB must be completed. If you have not done the initial sync, Please review the SQLink Install and Setup document.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Synchronization with SME and QB:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
1)   Synchronizing SME and QB&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;i.    Note: This will perform both an SME export and QB import. Since the SME export is performed first, records that are changed in both SME and QB will only get the SME changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;ii.    Note: QuickBooks .  will require you to log in to QuickBooks .  on the computer running SQLink. Log into QuickBooks . , SME, and SQLink and then run the sync. The user logging in to QuickBooks must have privileges that allow for the actions to be preformed by SQLink.  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SME:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;iii.    Within SME, Tools&amp;gt; Sync QuickBooks . .&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;iv.   [[File:Sync1(1).jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;v.    Answer ‘Ok’ to the prompt.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;vi.     Note if you do not have the option “Synchronize with QuickBooks . ”, or the menu option “Sync QuickBooks . ” then the initial import with QuickBooks .  has not occurred or has failed. Review the SQLink Install and Setup document or call contact High5 Software technical support at support@high5software.com&lt;br /&gt;
SQLink:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;vii.    Next start processing in SQLink by selecting Processing&amp;gt;Start Processes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;ix.   [[File:sync3(1).jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;x.    You will see SQLink starting the sync process.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.   SQLink checks for sync requests about once every few minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.   The Sync is complete when you see the words ‘Payment Processing Complete’&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;xi.    Note:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;xii.    If you encounter issues at this point it is most likely due to drive mappings that have been changed from the original sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;xiii.    To check:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.   Open SQLink&amp;gt; File&amp;gt; Link Setup&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.   Open QuickBooks . &amp;gt; F2&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.   The paths for QuickBooks .  must match exactly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink - Module Sync==&lt;br /&gt;
SQLink supports a manual module synchronization through the Data Functions menu item. You can Import QB data into SME or you can Export specific module items from SME to QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QuickBooks data to SME:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*    Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Data Functions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*    To Import QuickBooks Data:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*    [[File:sync4(2).jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1)   Import QuickBooks .  Data: This will import QB data into SME. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;a.   Note: if a common record such as Customer is modified in both SME and QB, this function will override the common data in SME with the QB data. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;b.   This imports all items from QB as mentioned above in the initial synchronization. Only changed items will synchronize so the sync process will be much faster than the initial sync.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The preferred method of sync is listed in the automatic, or SQLink Full Sync Full Sync pages, synchronization because errors can occur. For example if you try to export an Invoice from SME, but a new customer has not been exported yet, SQLink will retun an error from QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1)   Export New QuickBooks .  Data: This will export from SME to QB. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;a.  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; If a common record such as Customer is modified in both SME and QB, this function will override the common data in QB with the SME data. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;b.   Selections:&lt;br /&gt;
i.    Export Customers onl&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;ii.    Export Vendors only&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;iii.    Export Techs as Employee&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;iv.    Export Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;v.    Export Invoices&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;vi.    Export Payments&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;vii.    Export All of the above items&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;viii. [[File:sync5(1).jpg]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: When performing a manual sync you must sync in the order listedon the invocie. For exal=mple; you must eexport a customer before you can export an invocie for that customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customers Module Sync Details ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customer syncing is bi-directional when using SQLink. Customer can be modified in either SME or QuickBooks and those changes will update the other application. As is always the case there will be some instances where the update cannot take place as expected. This will only happen when exporting SME changes to QuickBooks. For more information refer to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Common SQLink Errors]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; If you are syncing SME with a QuickBooks company file that has the same customer list you will need to contact High5 Software to setup a test sync and address all issues prior to going ‘live’ with the sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Terms:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Initial Sync:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; refers to the initial import of QuickBooks lists into SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Routine Sync:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; refers to syncing per the users business requirements and can be performed at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Module Sync:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; refers to using the SQLink Data Functions Module sync to move SME information to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Site/Job:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Sites in SME = Jobs in QuickBooks ‘if’ the location is billing to a different location.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing Company:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The location to which you are sending the invoice for payment.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Syncing:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Initial sync:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The initial sync of SME and QuickBooks will bring all customer records from QuickBooks to SME. You have the option of excluding inactive customers. (It is recommended to bring in inactive customers as SME has provisions for viewing active customers, inactive customers, or all customers.)&lt;br /&gt;
Routine Sync: Once a customer is synchronized between SME and QuickBooks, changes can be made in either SME or QuickBooks and the changes will be reflected in the other program. Note: The SME data is exported/synced first, so in the rare case that a record is changed in both SME and QuickBooks, the SME changes will take place and the QuickBooks changes will be overwritten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Guidelines:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is a best practice to enter new customers in one application as this will minimize the chance of duplication. &lt;br /&gt;
Do not enter company names in SME in excess of 40 characters. (This is a QuickBooks limit). This shows in SQLink as an error on importing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the Billing customer for a Site/Job in SME you must put QuickBooks in ‘Single User Mode’ and then run the synchronization logged in as Admin. (This is a QuickBooks limitation.) The alternative is to move the Site/Job in QuickBooks and then run a routine sync.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Mandatory steps for adding new customers&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A best practice is to Always fill out ‘ALL’ information when setting up new records as this will avoid unnecessary errors when syncing invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;The following Fields will sync&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customer Name - QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Account Number – QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Company Name – QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;First Name, Last Name – QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Contact – QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Phone, Fax – QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Email – QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Billing Address – QuickBooks or SME (Note: Refer to Billing Address options below for details on Billing address setup.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Shipping Address – QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Taxes – QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Terms – QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Sales Person – QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Customer Taxes&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Review the customer tax setup after creating the customer regardless of the application. If you create the customer in QuickBooks review the tax and set it to the appropriate taxing authority.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; (QuickBooks uses a dummy tax as the default when syncing with integrated applications.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; QuickBooks does not provide for setting taxes on Sites/Jobs. The Billing location tax authority is used. SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; After initial creation of the customer SME can NOT change the tax code in QUICKBOOKS. So if the tax code for the customer is changed in SME, it is NOT automatically changed in QUICKBOOKS, and must be manually changed in QUICKBOOKS.&lt;br /&gt;
Customer tax setting will override all item level settings. If the customer is tax exempt then the entire invoice will be tax exempt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;SQLink Billing Name Options&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Open SQLink and go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- You will see the following options for Billing address export: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Billing.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing Name = Customer Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The Billing name in SME will be matched to the ‘Customer Name’ from QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing Name = Company Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The Billing Name will be matched to the ‘Company Name’ from QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing Name = First Line of Billing Address&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The Billing Name in SME will be matched to the First Line’ of the Billing Address Block. (This is because QuickBooks does not actually treat this as a company name field. They treat it as list of 5 address fields.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Use Parent Billing Name for non billable companies.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
A non billable company is one that has the ‘Is Billable’ flag unchecked in SME. If this is unchecked the option that is chosen above will be used for the Billing Address.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SQLinkSetting_BillNameEqualsCustomer.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BillNameEqualsCustomerNameIllustration.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BillNameEqualsCompanySetting.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BillNameEqualsCompanyIllustration.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Customer Phone Number Sync&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When entering a new customer in SME, the first and third phone number fields sync to QuickBooks Phone and FAX phone numbers as shown in the image below. Even if you change the phone label in SME, it still will sync the first and third phone number fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomerPhoneNumberSync.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Vendors Module Sync Details ==&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor syncing is bi-directional when using SQLink with the exception of the 1099 setting. Vendors can be modified in either SME or QuickBooks and those changes will update the other application. As is always the case there will be some instances where the update cannot take place as expected. This will only happen when exporting SME changes to QuickBooks. For more information refer to the Vendor errors &amp;amp; troubleshooting pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: If you are syncing SME with a QuickBooks company file that has the same vendor list you will need to contact High5 Software to setup a test sync and address all issues prior to going ‘live’ with the sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Initial Sync: refers to the initial import of QuickBooks lists into SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Routine Sync: refers to syncing per the users business requirements and can be performed at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Module Sync: refers to using the SQLink Data Functions Module sync to move SME information to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Syncing:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Initial sync: The initial sync of SME and QuickBooks will bring all vendor records from QuickBooks to SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Routine Sync: Once a vendor is synchronized between SME and QuickBooks, changes can be made in either SME or QuickBooks and the changes will be reflected in the other program with the exception of the 1099 setting. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The SME data is exported/synced first, so in the rare case that a record is changed in both SME and QuickBooks, the SME changes will take place and the QuickBooks changes will be overwritten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Guidelines:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is a best practice to enter new vendors in one application as this will minimize the chance of duplication. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Do not enter Vendor names in SME in excess of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;40 characters&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. (This is a QuickBooks limit). This shows in SQLink as an error on importing.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Mandatory steps for adding new Vendors:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A best practice is to Always fill out ‘ALL’ information when setting up new records as this will avoid unnecessary errors when syncing invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;The following Fields will sync:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Vendor Name – QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Company Name - QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Account Number – QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Address Information – QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;First Name, Last Name – QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Contact – QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Phone, Fax – QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Email – QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Terms – QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Vendor 1099 or Sub Contractor&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 1099(QB) or Subcontractor(SME) settings are set in QuickBooks and synced to SME. Once the initial setting is synced it is a manual setting in either program should you change the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you are adding a new subcontractor in SME, before you check &amp;quot;is Sub&amp;quot; in the SME vendor, sync the vendor record to QB first, then you can set &amp;quot;is sub&amp;quot; in SME and setup as eligible for 1099 in QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;http://support.quickbooks.intuit.com/support/pages/inproducthelp/Core/QB2K8/ContentPackage/Payroll/1099/popup_1099pref_table.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Employees and Technicians Sync Details ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Employees&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Employees sync to SME from QuickBooks as users. To turn the User record in SME into a Technician, check the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Is Technician&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*     All address fields should be completed in QuickBooks since blank fields can cause errors should you edit the employee in SME and the edit attempts to sync back to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
*     All employees sync regardless of Active or Inactive status&lt;br /&gt;
*     Salesperson settings sync with the employee&lt;br /&gt;
*    Employees can be entered in SME and not reside in QuickBooks &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;unless&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; they will become technicians and you are syncing TechTime. You must then add them as an employee in QuickBooks and sync them back to SME and check&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Is Technician&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in their user record. You will need to modify the SME name i.e., name-(SME), or something similar since name conflicts can occur.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;You must log in to QuickBooks as the&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Administrator&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;in &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Single User Mode&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;to export new employee&amp;#039;s from QuickBooks to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; . This is a QuickBooks requirement. If a sync has been processed, and QuickBooks is not logged in with a user that has employee editing permissions, you will need to do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Log in to QB as Admin or a user with employee editing permissions&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2)  Edit the employee in QB to reset the ‘is modified’ flag (i.e. add a period to the address)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3)  Put QB in Single User mode&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4)  Run a sync&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5)  Return QB to multi-user mode&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When filling out a new employee in QuickBooks, make sure you fill out their &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;state&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. If you do not, QuickBooks will enter &amp;quot;none&amp;quot; in their state which goes to SME as the state of &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;. If the employee is edited in SME, QuickBooks will reject the employee on export because it doesn&amp;#039;t recognize the state of &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
     &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Technicians&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians are created by checking the Is Technician checkbox on a User in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:IsTechnicianCheckbox.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If the user record isn&amp;#039;t entered in SME yet, you can do one of the two options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Enter user as an employee in QuickBooks and sync&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Enter the user in SME. (check Is Technician AFTER you save the User)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When entering a new User in SME, when you click Save you will be asked if you want Export the user to QuickBooks as an employee. If you are syncing Technician labor time in SME to QuickBooks time sheets, then your tech will need to be in QuickBooks as an employee.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ExportToQuickBooksMessage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you click Yes, the Export to QuickBooks flag will be checked. On the next sync, the user will sync to a QuickBooks employee.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;After&amp;#039;&amp;#039; you save the user, you can check&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Is Technician&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;click this link to read about syncing time sheets to QuickBooks http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink#Tech_Time_.28syncing_time_sheets_to_QB.29&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to transfer technician time from SMP labor items in orders to QuickBooks time sheets, the following configuration must be established:&lt;br /&gt;
*    In SQLink&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transfer Tech Tim&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;e set the check box&lt;br /&gt;
*    [[File:TechSettings.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
*    And if you want labor edits to overwrite previously existing entries for the order check the &amp;#039;Replace Tech Time Records on Change&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#The technician must be synced with SME and appear on the Setup&amp;gt; User List in SME with the Is Technician check box checked.&lt;br /&gt;
#[[File:IsTech.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#The employee must be enabled for Payroll Info in QuickBooks as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
*Edit the Employee&lt;br /&gt;
*Change tabs to “Payroll and Compensation Info”&lt;br /&gt;
*Under Earnings, setup an item such as Hourly. If no item exists create one.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select “Use time data to create paychecks”&lt;br /&gt;
*After sync, the each technician’s labor time from the SME order will show in the weekly Timesheet in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Field List:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Employees/Technicians - QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Name - QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Address, City, St, Zip - QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Phone - QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Email - QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Log In Name - QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Is Salesperson - QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Is Active - QuickBooks or SME&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Invoice Sync Details ==&lt;br /&gt;
Invoices that are created in SME will sync to QuickBooks if you have SME to sync invoices by default. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DefaultExportOnInvoices_setting.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To set the invoices to sync from SME to QuickBooks on the next sync by default:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Open SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export On Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;With this setting, any new invoices created in SME will have the Export to QuickBooks checkbox checked. After the invoice syncs to QuickBooks, the box will be cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click [[Editing a Combined Invoice]] to learn about how edited combined invoices in SME update the invoice in QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- If an invoice is deleted in SME, the invoice is not deleted in QuickBooks. You will need to delete the invoice in QuickBooks also.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;SME Invoice Field Syncing&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The chart below shows which SME invoice fields sync to QuickBooks invoice fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:InvoiceFieldMapping.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Invoice Numbers&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Invoice Numbers in SME and QuickBooks]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to read about your options on invoice numbers in SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WARNING:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Fixed Total option on Items and syncing warning to QuickBooks&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using &amp;quot;Fixed Total&amp;quot; on Service, Material, or Labor items you must be aware that the Total Price is what gets fixed in the SME Item. You can change the Unit Price or Quantity and the total price will stay the same in SME for that item. If you invoice the item and the invoice goes to QuickkBooks, the Unit Price and Qty are sent over on the invoice which potentially could be different than the fixed total price if you edited the Unit Price or Qty in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Purchase Order Sync Details ==&lt;br /&gt;
In SQLink on the Import/Export Options tab, you will find the Purchase Order Options section (shown in the image below)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SQLink_PurchaseORderOptions.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you are creating Purchase Orders in SME, you need to decide how your SME POs are going to sync with QuickBooks. You have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; - Create PO in SME and SME will send the same PO to QuickBooks on the next sync. You would have to receive stock on both POs.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; - Create PO in SME, receive items on the PO in SME, on next sync SME will put a bill in QB for the items received. The bill will increase the stock in QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; - Create PO in SME and send both the PO and the Bill in QuickBooks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Click this link for details and video&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings#Export_Options_for_Purchase_Orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Initialize PO Bill Date to from Received Item:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checked, the date on the bill that goes to QB will be the date you received the item, not the PO date.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Initialize by PO Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sets the date on the Bill in QB to the line item receipt date from the SME PO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Purchase Order Field Synced&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Below is a chart showing which SME PO fields sync to the QB Purchase Order or QB Bill fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:POSyncMapping.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tech Time (syncing time sheets to QB) ==&lt;br /&gt;
SME labor item records sync with QuickBooks weekly time sheet. Customer name and job number are transferred. Time sheets must be turned on in QuickBooks to use this feature.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To set up SQLink to transfer tech time, open SQLink. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transfer Tech Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Replace Tech time Records on Change&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; (circled in image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TransferTechTimeSetting.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The image below shows labor items scheduled for a Tech in SME Dispatch and how the tech time transfers to QB Timesheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:LaborITemsToTimesheet2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ExportTimesheetCheckBox.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;* If you do not want labor records created in SME to immediately sync to QB on the next sync, go to SME &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Don&amp;#039;t default Tech Timesheet Export&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. You will then have to check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Timesheet to Quickbooks&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on each labor item when you are ready for it to sync to QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DontDefaulExportTimesheet.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* We do not &amp;#039;&amp;#039;delete&amp;#039;&amp;#039; time sheet entries in QB. We update existing entries and can reassign entries to another tech.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* If you entered a Labor record for a tech, synced to QB, and later added or removed time the timesheet entry will be updated as opposed to creating a new entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* You can reassign a timesheet entry to another tech.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* You cannot delete a labor record in SME and subsequently have the timesheet record deleted in QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* If you sync the labor item to QB timesheet and then delete the service order in SME, the tech time is not deleted from QB timesheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Auto Process Timer ==&lt;br /&gt;
In SQLink click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and set the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Auto Process Timer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to the number of minutes you want to automatically sync. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To run the Auto Process sync, open QuickBooks and then open SQLink and select Processes&amp;gt;Auto Process.  This will automatically sync based on the number of minutes set for the Auto Process Timer.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AutoProcessTimer.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AutoProcess.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Auto Sync depends on a combination of 3 items:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1)      QuickBooks has remained open and is allowing connections to the company file&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2)      The SQL service has not been interrupted breaking the connection to SQLink&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3)      There have not been any backs that change the state of either QB or SME&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Updates_and_Revisions&amp;diff=6257</id>
		<title>Updates and Revisions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Updates_and_Revisions&amp;diff=6257"/>
		<updated>2017-03-15T16:25:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Note:  SME is not able to do automatic updates because all users need to be out of SME for the updates.  It&amp;#039;s up to the customer to look for updates either here, from SME New Features &amp;amp; addons &amp;gt; Latest Features and Release Notes, or our twitter page [https://twitter.com/high5software @High5Software]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[SME 8.1 - 8.2 Revision History]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[SME 8.0 - Revision History]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[SME 8.0 – New Features &amp;amp; Functionality]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[SME 7.2 - Revision History]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[SME 7.2 – New Features &amp;amp; Functionality]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[SME 7.1 – Revision History]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[SME 7.1 - New Features &amp;amp; Functionality]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[SME 7.0 – Revision History]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[SME 6.3 - 7.1 Legacy Builds]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contact High 5 Software to inquire about upgrading to the latest version of SME.&lt;br /&gt;
Upgrade now and explore the many new features including mobile features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SME9 is an unreleased version only for specific customer needs.  Information on SME9 updates can be found here:&lt;br /&gt;
[https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1rR36XAooInc-iM-osRXdZLyFeBvPRxILdHz-jfdmf64/edit?usp=sharing SME 9.0 - Revision History]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[SME 9.0 - New Features &amp;amp; Functionality]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Customer_Equipment&amp;diff=6256</id>
		<title>Customer Equipment</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Customer_Equipment&amp;diff=6256"/>
		<updated>2017-03-07T16:55:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: /* Customer Equipment Details */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;bGawsrnNNFQ&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
SME has excellent ability to track and manage your customer’s equipment. Customer Equipment is integrated throughout SME to improve tracking of the equipment and provide your customers excellent support. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer/Site&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to select a customer and the customer’s Customer Equipment tree will display (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomerEquipmentTree.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adding Items to Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When setting up your inventory items in SME, you can check Add to Cust EQ (circled in image below). Add this inventory item to an order for a customer and once the order is closed, the equipment will automatically be listed in their Customer Equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:inventoryItem_AddToCustEQ.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Equipment can also be added manually through the Customer Equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer/Site&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the customer you need to add equipment to.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Right click and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add New Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4)  In the Customer Equipment window, click [[File:Magnify.jpg]] next to the Item Name field and select the equipment from the inventory list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Equipment Details ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double click on any equipment in the Customer Equipment list to see the equipment details such as serial number, repair history and set the maintenance expiration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Item Details tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab holds general information about the equipment. Fields to note:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomerEQ_ItemDetails.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Parent Item &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – In the Customer Equipment tree, you can create a hierarchical structure showing sub equipment under parent equipment (e.g. server rack as top level, and components of the server under the top level). There are unlimited levels of parent-child levels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can assign a parent to equipment by selecting the parent in the Parent Item field, or by dragging the item under the parent item on the Customer Equipment tree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt; Reference &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - This number provides an ordering for the equipment in the tree. Lowest number, or blanks,show at the top and highest numbers show at the bottom. You can also rearrange the order by dragging the items around on the equipment tree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Install Date&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – Select a date from calendar to track the install date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MTBF&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;- Mean Time Before Failure is populated from the inventory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Usage Hours&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – Manually enter the usage hours every time you look at the usage hours of the equipment.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;**NOTE**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Your SME Administrator may have created a few custom fields not shown in the screenshot above. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maintenance tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Track maintenance and expiration warranties, set activities for expiration warnings and set the service level agreement for the equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustEQ_MaintenanceTab.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Maintenance and Manufacturer Warranty Expiration&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  - Select the expiration date or click  to select a standard period and the date will populate.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On Expiration, Create an Activity&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;   – Check this and select a SME user to receive the activity upon expiration date. The user selected needs to make sure the check Generate Customer Equipment Warning in Preferences, On Startup tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;SLA Category (Service Level Agreement) &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;   – Set your commitment to the customer for this equipment (e.g. 4 hour response time). Your SME Administrator will set up your SLA Categories.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Maintenance Frequency&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;   – reference field&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Maintenance Price&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – reference field&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Vendor Warranty&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Customer Warranty&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  fields are reference fields populated with information set in inventory item.    &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Repair History tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the Customer Equipment tree, you can right click on an item and select New Service Order. That service order will be listed on the Repair History tab as reference.You can reference the Order #, Service Date and Closed Date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Scheduled Services tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Shows all scheduled services for this equipment. (Note: Scheduled services are not recommended, use Recurring Orders)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Service History tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Shows all service orders for that equipment. If the equipment is added to the Item Repair tab on the service order, then the service order will display on this tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustEQ_ServiceHistoryTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Kit Items tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Kit items can be setup in the inventory item. These are reference items to various parts for the equipment for example parts that should be changed. For example, if the equipment was a specific car model, the kit item might be the oil filter type, the oil type, and the recommended tires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Transactions tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Shows all the equipment transactions such as adding, moving to another customer site, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustEQ_Transaction.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Stored Documents tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;On this tab, you can add new documents to the equipment and view documents that have been added. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomerEquipment_StoredDocumentsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Equipment Actions Menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on any item in the Customer Equipment tree or click the actions menu. You can also select an item and click Actions to initiate an action for the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustEQ_Actions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Add New Item&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – Add a new item to the customer’s equipment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Insert New Item&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Right click on equipment in the list and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Insert New Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The new item will be listed under the equipment you right clicked on, a child under the parent item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Add From Inventory&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Select material from your inventory list to add to your customer&amp;#039;s equipment list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Insert From Inventory&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Right click on equipment and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Insert From Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to select material from your inventory list. The equipment will be listed under the equipment you right clicked on. It will be a child equipment under the parent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Equipment Editor&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – Same as double clicking on the item to edit the equipment details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;New Service Order&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;New Install Order&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;– Creates a new order for this customer and enters this equipment into the Item Repair tab on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Move to another site&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – moves the equipment to another customer or site.  This removes the equipment off the Customer Equipment tree. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Return Remove/Retire&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Sets the equipment status to “retired” on the Customer Equipment tree and creates a Return. In the Return, you can receive the item back into your inventory. To learn more, click [[Returns]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Return Replace&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – Sets the equipment status to “On RMA” and creates a Return. When processing the return in the inventory module, you will be prompted to select another item from inventory to replace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Swap with another item&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Swap this equipment with other equipment for the same customer site. This is used for example if you have a spare part and want to swap with an active part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Delete&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Delete the equipment from the list. Note: this is not reversible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Import From file&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;- Import customer equipment list from a csv (comma separated value) or excel file. This will open the Data Import screen to view and map the data to SME fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Export to Excel&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Export the equipment list to an excel file. You will be prompted to choose a location to save the excel file and the file will automatically open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Print or Email Equipment List ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.       In &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;/&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Site&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to select the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;/&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Email&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustEQ_Print.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu, there are standard reports you can print above the horizontal line and you can also email the standard reports by selecting below the horizontal line. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:custEQ_Printed.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Fields in Customer Equipment ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create custom fields in Customer Equipment to track specific information needed for your situation. The image below shows Customer Equipment with custom fields to Make, Model, Year, VIN Number, etc. If there is data you need to track in equipment, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Custom Tabs and Fields]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to learn how to add the custom fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomerEQ_CustomFields.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Customer_Equipment&amp;diff=6255</id>
		<title>Customer Equipment</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Customer_Equipment&amp;diff=6255"/>
		<updated>2017-03-07T16:53:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;bGawsrnNNFQ&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
SME has excellent ability to track and manage your customer’s equipment. Customer Equipment is integrated throughout SME to improve tracking of the equipment and provide your customers excellent support. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer/Site&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to select a customer and the customer’s Customer Equipment tree will display (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomerEquipmentTree.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adding Items to Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When setting up your inventory items in SME, you can check Add to Cust EQ (circled in image below). Add this inventory item to an order for a customer and once the order is closed, the equipment will automatically be listed in their Customer Equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:inventoryItem_AddToCustEQ.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Equipment can also be added manually through the Customer Equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer/Site&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the customer you need to add equipment to.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Right click and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add New Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4)  In the Customer Equipment window, click [[File:Magnify.jpg]] next to the Item Name field and select the equipment from the inventory list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Equipment Details ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double click on any equipment in the Customer Equipment list to see the equipment details such as serial number, repair history and set the maintenance expiration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Details tab&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab holds general information about the equipment. Fields to note:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomerEQ_ItemDetails.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Parent Item &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – In the Customer Equipment tree, you can create a hierarchical structure showing sub equipment under parent equipment (e.g. server rack as top level, and components of the server under the top level). There are unlimited levels of parent-child levels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can assign a parent to equipment by selecting the parent in the Parent Item field, or by dragging the item under the parent item on the Customer Equipment tree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt; Reference &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - This number provides an ordering for the equipment in the tree. Lowest number, or blanks,show at the top and highest numbers show at the bottom. You can also rearrange the order by dragging the items around on the equipment tree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Install Date&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – Select a date from calendar to track the install date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MTBF&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;- Mean Time Before Failure is populated from the inventory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Usage Hours&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – Manually enter the usage hours every time you look at the usage hours of the equipment.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;**NOTE**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Your SME Administrator may have created a few custom fields not shown in the screenshot above. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maintenance tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Track maintenance and expiration warranties, set activities for expiration warnings and set the service level agreement for the equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustEQ_MaintenanceTab.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Maintenance and Manufacturer Warranty Expiration&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  - Select the expiration date or click  to select a standard period and the date will populate.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On Expiration, Create an Activity&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;   – Check this and select a SME user to receive the activity upon expiration date. The user selected needs to make sure the check Generate Customer Equipment Warning in Preferences, On Startup tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;SLA Category (Service Level Agreement) &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;   – Set your commitment to the customer for this equipment (e.g. 4 hour response time). Your SME Administrator will set up your SLA Categories.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Maintenance Frequency&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;   – reference field&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Maintenance Price&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – reference field&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Vendor Warranty&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Customer Warranty&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  fields are reference fields populated with information set in inventory item.    &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Repair History tab&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the Customer Equipment tree, you can right click on an item and select New Service Order. That service order will be listed on the Repair History tab as reference.You can reference the Order #, Service Date and Closed Date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Scheduled Services tab&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Shows all scheduled services for this equipment. (Note: Scheduled services are not recommended, use Recurring Orders)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service History tab&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Shows all service orders for that equipment. If the equipment is added to the Item Repair tab on the service order, then the service order will display on this tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustEQ_ServiceHistoryTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Kit Items tab&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Kit items can be setup in the inventory item. These are reference items to various parts for the equipment for example parts that should be changed. For example, if the equipment was a specific car model, the kit item might be the oil filter type, the oil type, and the recommended tires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transactions tab&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Shows all the equipment transactions such as adding, moving to another customer site, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustEQ_Transaction.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Stored Documents tab&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;On this tab, you can add new documents to the equipment and view documents that have been added. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomerEquipment_StoredDocumentsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Equipment Actions Menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on any item in the Customer Equipment tree or click the actions menu. You can also select an item and click Actions to initiate an action for the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustEQ_Actions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Add New Item&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – Add a new item to the customer’s equipment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Insert New Item&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Right click on equipment in the list and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Insert New Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The new item will be listed under the equipment you right clicked on, a child under the parent item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Add From Inventory&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Select material from your inventory list to add to your customer&amp;#039;s equipment list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Insert From Inventory&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Right click on equipment and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Insert From Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to select material from your inventory list. The equipment will be listed under the equipment you right clicked on. It will be a child equipment under the parent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Equipment Editor&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – Same as double clicking on the item to edit the equipment details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;New Service Order&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;New Install Order&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;– Creates a new order for this customer and enters this equipment into the Item Repair tab on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Move to another site&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – moves the equipment to another customer or site.  This removes the equipment off the Customer Equipment tree. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Return Remove/Retire&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Sets the equipment status to “retired” on the Customer Equipment tree and creates a Return. In the Return, you can receive the item back into your inventory. To learn more, click [[Returns]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Return Replace&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; – Sets the equipment status to “On RMA” and creates a Return. When processing the return in the inventory module, you will be prompted to select another item from inventory to replace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Swap with another item&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Swap this equipment with other equipment for the same customer site. This is used for example if you have a spare part and want to swap with an active part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Delete&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Delete the equipment from the list. Note: this is not reversible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Import From file&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;- Import customer equipment list from a csv (comma separated value) or excel file. This will open the Data Import screen to view and map the data to SME fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Export to Excel&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; - Export the equipment list to an excel file. You will be prompted to choose a location to save the excel file and the file will automatically open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Print or Email Equipment List ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.       In &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;/&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Site&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to select the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;/&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Email&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustEQ_Print.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu, there are standard reports you can print above the horizontal line and you can also email the standard reports by selecting below the horizontal line. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:custEQ_Printed.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom Fields in Customer Equipment ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create custom fields in Customer Equipment to track specific information needed for your situation. The image below shows Customer Equipment with custom fields to Make, Model, Year, VIN Number, etc. If there is data you need to track in equipment, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Custom Tabs and Fields]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to learn how to add the custom fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomerEQ_CustomFields.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Online&amp;diff=6243</id>
		<title>SME Online</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Online&amp;diff=6243"/>
		<updated>2017-02-08T17:18:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Your laptops, smartphones, and tablets just got more powerful — so did your salespeople!&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Announcing Mobile Sales for SME for Preview Release&lt;br /&gt;
Building on success of [[Customer Cloud for SME]] and [[Mobile Tech for SME]], now we’ve added Mobile Sales for SME. This is all a part of our continuing mission to empower you to “Run a Better Service Business.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To try a demo follow these simple steps:&lt;br /&gt;
* Open browser on any device and go to https://cloud.h5sw.com/2.0&lt;br /&gt;
* Select &amp;quot;Try a Demo&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Mobile Sales for SME:&lt;br /&gt;
* If showing the home page, select Modules&amp;gt;Sales&lt;br /&gt;
* Select various modules on the left to go to customers, Leads, Proposals, Service Orders, Install Orders, Invoices, or Contacts.  On a mobile device this is an icon second from the top left.&lt;br /&gt;
* Search for the record you want using the powerful search capability.&lt;br /&gt;
* Filter records with the powerful filtering tool by selecting the filter icon in the search window&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a record or select the square icon in the top right&lt;br /&gt;
* To go back to the list, select the list icon.&lt;br /&gt;
* Actions can be found in the top actions icon to do any action from anywhere.&lt;br /&gt;
* Actions for a specific record can be found in the action icon at the top of the record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please send all feedback and suggestions to sales@h5sw.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mobile Sales for SME is a cloud-based solution that works for salespeople across the entire sales cycle, from initial prospecting to creating proposals, work orders, invoices, and contacts. Salespeople access Mobile Sales for SME wherever they are and from any web-accessible device. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Mobile Sales for SME - Empowering Salespeople&lt;br /&gt;
* Integrated with SME&lt;br /&gt;
** Salespeople can track customer information and interactions from initial prospect to closed customer&lt;br /&gt;
** Salespeople can make more insightful decisions to heighten service levels and close more deals&lt;br /&gt;
** Salespeople can manage Work Orders for both Service and Install Orders&lt;br /&gt;
** Salespeople can invoice customers to accelerate cash flow and commissions&lt;br /&gt;
* Subcontractor Feature&lt;br /&gt;
** View service order locations and those subcontractors located nearby&lt;br /&gt;
* Fully responsive web-based application&lt;br /&gt;
** Salespeople securely access the application on any web-accessible device and anywhere they have an internet connection&lt;br /&gt;
** Salespeople can use whatever screen they choose or even move between screens -  mobile smartphones, tablets, and laptop PCs &lt;br /&gt;
If you have salespeople working remotely empowering them with Mobile Sales for SME. At $30/user/month it is an affordable path to improving sale performance and your customers&amp;#039; experience with your business.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Online&amp;diff=6242</id>
		<title>SME Online</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Online&amp;diff=6242"/>
		<updated>2017-02-08T17:17:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marks: Created page with &amp;quot;Your laptops, smartphones, and tablets just got more powerful — so did your salespeople!   Announcing Mobile Sales for SME for Preview Release Building on success of Custo...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Your laptops, smartphones, and tablets just got more powerful — so did your salespeople!&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Announcing Mobile Sales for SME for Preview Release&lt;br /&gt;
Building on success of [[Customer Cloud]] and [[Mobile Tech for SME]], now we’ve added Mobile Sales for SME. This is all a part of our continuing mission to empower you to “Run a Better Service Business.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To try a demo follow these simple steps:&lt;br /&gt;
* Open browser on any device and go to https://cloud.h5sw.com/2.0&lt;br /&gt;
* Select &amp;quot;Try a Demo&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Mobile Sales for SME:&lt;br /&gt;
* If showing the home page, select Modules&amp;gt;Sales&lt;br /&gt;
* Select various modules on the left to go to customers, Leads, Proposals, Service Orders, Install Orders, Invoices, or Contacts.  On a mobile device this is an icon second from the top left.&lt;br /&gt;
* Search for the record you want using the powerful search capability.&lt;br /&gt;
* Filter records with the powerful filtering tool by selecting the filter icon in the search window&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a record or select the square icon in the top right&lt;br /&gt;
* To go back to the list, select the list icon.&lt;br /&gt;
* Actions can be found in the top actions icon to do any action from anywhere.&lt;br /&gt;
* Actions for a specific record can be found in the action icon at the top of the record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please send all feedback and suggestions to sales@h5sw.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mobile Sales for SME is a cloud-based solution that works for salespeople across the entire sales cycle, from initial prospecting to creating proposals, work orders, invoices, and contacts. Salespeople access Mobile Sales for SME wherever they are and from any web-accessible device. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Mobile Sales for SME - Empowering Salespeople&lt;br /&gt;
* Integrated with SME&lt;br /&gt;
** Salespeople can track customer information and interactions from initial prospect to closed customer&lt;br /&gt;
** Salespeople can make more insightful decisions to heighten service levels and close more deals&lt;br /&gt;
** Salespeople can manage Work Orders for both Service and Install Orders&lt;br /&gt;
** Salespeople can invoice customers to accelerate cash flow and commissions&lt;br /&gt;
* Subcontractor Feature&lt;br /&gt;
** View service order locations and those subcontractors located nearby&lt;br /&gt;
* Fully responsive web-based application&lt;br /&gt;
** Salespeople securely access the application on any web-accessible device and anywhere they have an internet connection&lt;br /&gt;
** Salespeople can use whatever screen they choose or even move between screens -  mobile smartphones, tablets, and laptop PCs &lt;br /&gt;
If you have salespeople working remotely empowering them with Mobile Sales for SME. At $30/user/month it is an affordable path to improving sale performance and your customers&amp;#039; experience with your business.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marks</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>